Vous êtes sur la page 1sur 372

BC-5300Vet Auto Hematology Analyzer

Service Manual
2009-2010 Shenzhen Mindray Bio-medical Electronics Co., Ltd. All rights Reserved.
For this Operators Manual, the issued Date is 2010-12.

Intellectual Property Statement


SHENZHEN MINDRAY BIO-MEDICAL ELECTRONICS CO., LTD. (hereinafter called Mindray)
owns the intellectual property rights to this Mindray product and this manual. This manual may
refer to information protected by copyright or patents and does not convey any license under
the patent rights or copyright of Mindray, or of others.

Mindray intends to maintain the contents of this manual as confidential information. Disclosure
of the information in this manual in any manner whatsoever without the written permission of
Mindray is strictly forbidden.

Release, amendment, reproduction, distribution, rental, adaptation, translation or any other


derivative work of this manual in any manner whatsoever without the written permission of
Mindray is strictly forbidden.

, , are the trademarks, registered or otherwise, of Mindray in


China and other countries. All other trademarks that appear in this manual are used only for
informational or editorial purposes. They are the property of their respective owners.

Responsibility on the Manufacturer Party


Contents of this manual are subject to change without prior notice.

All information contained in this manual is believed to be correct. Mindray shall not be liable for
errors contained herein or for incidental or consequential damages in connection with the
furnishing, performance, or use of this manual.

Mindray is responsible for the effects on safety, reliability and performance of this product, only
if:
all installation operations, expansions, changes, modifications and repairs of this
product are conducted by Mindray authorized personnel;

the electrical installation of the relevant room complies with the applicable national
and local requirements; and

the product is used in accordance with the instructions for use.

I
It is important for the hospital or organization that employs this equipment
to carry out a reasonable service/maintenance plan. Neglect of this may
result in machine breakdown or injury of human health.

Be sure to operate the analyzer under the situation specified in this manual;
otherwise, the analyzer will not work normally and the analysis results will
be unreliable, which would damage the analyzer components and cause
personal injury.

This equipment must be operated by skilled/trained clinical professionals.

II
Warranty
THIS WARRANTY IS EXCLUSIVE AND IS IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES,
EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR
FITNESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE.

Exemptions

Mindray's obligation or liability under this warranty does not include any transportation or other
charges or liability for direct, indirect or consequential damages or delay resulting from the
improper use or application of the product or the use of parts or accessories not approved by
Mindray or repairs by people other than Mindray authorized personnel.

This warranty shall not extend to:

Malfunction or damage caused by improper use or man-made failure.

Malfunction or damage caused by unstable or out-of-range power input.

Malfunction or damage caused by force majeure such as fire and earthquake.

Malfunction or damage caused by improper operation or repair by unqualified or


unauthorized service people.

Malfunction of the instrument or part whose serial number is not legible enough.

Others not caused by instrument or part itself.

III
Company Contact

Manufacturer: Shenzhen Mindray Bio-Medical Electronics Co., Ltd.


E-mail Address: service@mindray.com

Tel: +86 755 26582479 26582888

Fax: +86 755 26582934 26582500

EC-Representative: Shanghai International Holding Corp. GmbH(Europe)

Address: Eiffestrae 80, Hamburg 20537, Germany

Tel: 0049-40-2513175

Fax: 0049-40-255726

IV
Table of Contents
1 Using This Manual............................................................................................... 1-1
1.1 Introduction............................................................................................................ 1-1
1.2 Who Should Read This Manual............................................................................. 1-2
1.3 How to Find Information ........................................................................................ 1-3
1.4 Conventions Used in This Manual......................................................................... 1-4
1.5 Symbols ................................................................................................................. 1-5

2 System Structure................................................................................................. 2-1


2.1 Introduction............................................................................................................ 2-1
2.2 Fluidic System ....................................................................................................... 2-2
2.3 Hardware System .................................................................................................. 2-2
2.4 Main Unit................................................................................................................ 2-2
2.5 Software structure ................................................................................................. 2-9
2.5.1 Menu structure ......................................................................................... 2-9
2.5.2 Passwords.............................................................................................. 2-18

3 Instrument Installation and Software Upgrade................................................. 3-1


3.1 Preparations .......................................................................................................... 3-1
3.1.1 Purpose .................................................................................................... 3-1
3.1.2 Tools ......................................................................................................... 3-1
3.1.3 Accessories .............................................................................................. 3-1
3.2 Installation Requirements ...................................................................................... 3-2
3.2.1 Space Requirements ................................................................................ 3-2
3.2.2 Power Requirements................................................................................ 3-2
3.2.3 Environment Requirements...................................................................... 3-2
3.2.4 PC Configuration Requirements .............................................................. 3-3
3.3 Package Checking and Unpacking ....................................................................... 3-7
3.3.1 Checks before unpacking......................................................................... 3-7
3.3.2 Unpacking Main Unit ................................................................................ 3-7
3.3.3 Checking packing list................................................................................ 3-9
3.4 Removal and Installation ..................................................................................... 3-10
3.5 Connections......................................................................................................... 3-17
3.6 Start-up ................................................................................................................ 3-21
3.6.1 Inspection before Startup ....................................................................... 3-21
3.7 Setup and Adjustment ......................................................................................... 3-30
3.8 Testing Other Functions....................................................................................... 3-35
3.9 Confirming Gain................................................................................................... 3-36
3.10 Calibration and Performance Test ....................................................................... 3-41
3.11 Software upgrade ................................................................................................ 3-50

4 Fluidic System ..................................................................................................... 4-1


4.1 Introduction of Fluidic Parts ................................................................................... 4-1
4.1.1 Sample probe ........................................................................................... 4-1
4.1.2 Probe Wipe............................................................................................... 4-1

1
Table of Contents

4.1.3 Pumps ...................................................................................................... 4-1


4.1.4 Syringes ................................................................................................... 4-1
4.1.5 Valves ....................................................................................................... 4-1
4.1.6 Baths ........................................................................................................ 4-2
4.1.7 Volumetric tube......................................................................................... 4-2
4.1.8 Filters........................................................................................................ 4-2
4.2 Fluidic System ....................................................................................................... 4-3
4.2.1 Reagent volume required......................................................................... 4-3
4.2.2 Fluidic System Drawing............................................................................ 4-5
4.2.3 WBC Measurement Procedures .............................................................. 4-6
4.2.4 RBC/PLT Measurement Procedures........................................................ 4-7
4.2.5 HGB Measurement Procedures ............................................................... 4-7
4.3 Sequence of Whole Blood CBC+DIFF Measurement ........................................... 4-8
4.3.1 Sampling and dispensing procedures ...................................................... 4-8
4.3.2 DIFF Channel ......................................................................................... 4-10
4.3.3 WBC/HGB Channel................................................................................ 4-12
4.3.4 RBC/PLT Channel .................................................................................. 4-15
4.3.5 Sequence of Predilute Mode CBC+DIFF Measurement........................ 4-17
4.3.6 Sequence of CBC Measurement ........................................................... 4-17

5 Hardware System ................................................................................................ 5-1


5.1 Mother board ......................................................................................................... 5-3
5.1.1 Introduction............................................................................................... 5-3
5.1.2 Board Composition................................................................................... 5-3
5.1.3 Adjustment and Test Points.................................................................... 5-26
5.1.4 Removal ................................................................................................. 5-27
5.1.5 Troubleshooting...................................................................................... 5-29
5.2 Data board ........................................................................................................... 5-31
5.2.1 Introduction............................................................................................. 5-31
5.2.2 Board composition.................................................................................. 5-31
5.2.3 Adjustment and Test Points.................................................................... 5-43
5.2.4 Disassembly and assembly method....................................................... 5-47
5.2.5 Troubleshooting...................................................................................... 5-48
5.3 Drive board .......................................................................................................... 5-56
5.3.1 Introduction............................................................................................. 5-56
5.3.2 Board composition.................................................................................. 5-56
5.3.3 Adjustment and Test Points.................................................................... 5-71
5.3.4 Disassembly and assembly method....................................................... 5-74
5.3.5 Troubleshooting...................................................................................... 5-76
5.4 Power board ........................................................................................................ 5-95
5.4.1 Introduction............................................................................................. 5-95
5.4.2 Board Composition................................................................................. 5-96
5.4.3 Adjustment and Test Points.................................................................. 5-101
5.4.4 Replacement and Connection.............................................................. 5-103
5.4.5 Troubleshooting.................................................................................... 5-106
5.5 Volumetric and pressure detecting board.......................................................... 5-108
5.5.1 Introduction........................................................................................... 5-108
5.5.2 Board Composition............................................................................... 5-108
5.5.3 Disassembly and assembly method......................................................5-111
5.5.4 Troubleshooting.................................................................................... 5-113
5.6 Liquid-level detecting board .............................................................................. 5-119
5.6.1 Introduction........................................................................................... 5-119
5.6.2 Board composition................................................................................ 5-119
5.6.3 Replacement and Connection.............................................................. 5-122
5.6.4 Troubleshooting.................................................................................... 5-124
5.7 Laser Control Board .......................................................................................... 5-126

2
Table of Contents

5.7.1 Introduction........................................................................................... 5-126


5.7.2 Board Composition............................................................................... 5-126
5.7.3 Adjustment and Test Points.................................................................. 5-129
5.7.4 Assembly and disassembly.................................................................. 5-130
5.7.5 Troubleshooting.................................................................................... 5-130
5.8 Pre-amplification board...................................................................................... 5-133
5.8.1 Introduction........................................................................................... 5-133
5.8.2 Board Composition............................................................................... 5-133
5.8.3 Adjustment and Test Points.................................................................. 5-137
5.8.4 Disassembly and assembly.................................................................. 5-137
5.8.5 Troubleshooting.................................................................................... 5-138
5.9 Indicator Board .................................................................................................. 5-140
5.9.1 Introduction........................................................................................... 5-140
5.9.2 Board Composition............................................................................... 5-140
5.9.3 Disassembly and assembly method..................................................... 5-141
5.9.4 Troubleshooting.................................................................................... 5-142

6 Maintenance......................................................................................................... 6-1
6.1 Maintenance Module and the Corresponding Settings ......................................... 6-1
6.2 General .................................................................................................................. 6-3
6.3 Disassembling the Panels ..................................................................................... 6-3
6.3.1 Removing the left door ............................................................................. 6-3
6.3.2 Removing the right door........................................................................... 6-4
6.3.3 Removing the top cover ........................................................................... 6-5
6.3.4 Removing the back panel......................................................................... 6-6
6.3.5 Removing the front cover assembly......................................................... 6-7
6.4 Replacing the Valves, Pumps and Syringes.......................................................... 6-9
6.4.1 Replacing the valve ................................................................................ 6-11
6.4.2 Replacing the Pressure Chamber .......................................................... 6-14
6.4.3 Replacing the Vacuum Chamber ........................................................... 6-15
6.4.4 Replacing the Syringe Assembly............................................................ 6-17
6.4.5 Replacing the Waste Pump.................................................................... 6-22
6.5 Replacing the Bath/Aperture Assembly............................................................... 6-24
6.6 Replacing the Sampling Module and Adjusting Position ..................................... 6-27
6.6.1 Replacing the Sample Probe and Wipe ................................................. 6-27
6.6.2 Replacing the Optical Sensor................................................................. 6-29
6.6.3 Removing the Sampling Module ............................................................ 6-31
6.6.4 Adjusting sample probe position ............................................................ 6-34
6.7 Maintaining and Replacing the DIFF Reaction Bath ........................................... 6-35

7 Optical System..................................................................................................... 7-1


7.1 Optical System Adjustment and Troubleshooting.................................................. 7-1
7.2 Removing and Installing Optical System Assemblies............................................ 7-2
7.2.1 Laser driver board .................................................................................... 7-2
7.2.2 Front light assembly ................................................................................. 7-3
7.2.3 Flow cell assembly ................................................................................... 7-4
7.2.4 Rear light collimator assembly ................................................................. 7-6
7.2.5 Beam splitter assembly ............................................................................ 7-6
7.2.6 Rear light collector assembly ................................................................... 7-7
7.2.7 Rear light detector assembly.................................................................... 7-9
7.3 Adjustment........................................................................................................... 7-11
7.3.1 Coarse adjustment ................................................................................. 7-11
7.3.2 Preparation before fine tuning................................................................ 7-17
7.3.3 Fine tuning.............................................................................................. 7-19

3
Table of Contents

7.3.4 Gain setup .............................................................................................. 7-23


7.4 Troubleshooting ................................................................................................... 7-25
7.4.1 Laser spot-deviation ............................................................................... 7-25
7.4.2 Flow cell clog.......................................................................................... 7-25
7.4.3 Dirty flow cell .......................................................................................... 7-26

8 Troubleshooting .................................................................................................. 8-1


8.1 Error code and information .................................................................................... 8-1
8.2 Errors indicated by error messages ...................................................................... 8-7
8.2.1 Pressure errors......................................................................................... 8-7
8.2.2 Reagent errors ......................................................................................... 8-7
8.2.3 Hardware errors ....................................................................................... 8-8
8.2.4 Measurement errors................................................................................. 8-8
8.2.5 Temperature errors................................................................................. 8-10

9 Appendixes ......................................................................................................... A-1


A. Accessories ...........................................................................................................A-1
B. List of Wearing Parts .............................................................................................B-1
C. Fluidic diagram ..................................................................................................... C-1
D. Pump and Valve Function Table ........................................................................... D-1
E. Tubing....................................................................................................................E-1
F. Error Module and the Classified Errors ................................................................. F-1
G. Maintenance Module and the Corresponding Settings ........................................ G-1
H. Method to identify cross network cable and direct-connected network cable ...... H-1

4
1 Using This Manual

1.1 Introduction

The chapter explains how to use the hematology analyzer service manual. This manual
provides the reference information and procedures. Before servicing hematology analyzer,
read and understand the manual carefully for servicing the equipment properly and for your
safety.

This manual is to be used in conjunction with the operators manual of hematology analyzer. It
does not contain information and procedures already covered in the operators manual.

Be sure to operate and service the analyzer strictly as instructed in this


manual and the operators manual.

1-1
Using This Manual

1.2 Who Should Read This Manual

To use this service manual effectively, the reader should posses:


A thorough understanding of

Basic electronic and fluidics principles and devices

Reagent systems

Quality control

Troubleshooting concepts

The ability to

Use basic mechanical tools and understand related terminology

Use a digital voltmeter (DVM) and an oscilloscope

Read fluidics schematics and understand related terminology

Read electronic schematics and understand related terminology

1-2
Using This Manual

1.3 How to Find Information

This service manual comprises 8 chapters and 5 appendices. Refer to the table below to find
the information you need.

If you want to See


learn about the system structure and the basic Chapter 2 System Structure
principle of the hematology analyzer
learn about the installation requirements and how to Chapter 3 System Installation and
upgrade the hematology analyzer software Software Upgrade
learn about the fluidic system Chapter 4 Fluidic System
learn about the hardware system Chapter 5 Hardware System
learn about how to maintain Chapter 6 Maintenance
learn about the optical system Chapter 7 Optical System
learn about how to troubleshoot the common errors Chapter 8 Troubleshooting
learn about the main spare parts Appendix A List of Spare Parts
learn about the main wearing parts Appendix B List of Wearing Parts
learn about the schematic diagram of the fluidic Appendix C Fluidic Diagram
system
learn about the function of each valve and pump Appendix D Pump and Valve Function
Table
learn about the tubing connection Appendix E Tubing
learn about the error module and the classified errors Appendix F Error Module and the
Classified Errors
learn about the maintenance module and the Appendix G Maintenance Module and
corresponding settings the Corresponding Settings

1-3
Using This Manual

1.4 Conventions Used in This Manual

This manual uses certain typographical conventions to clarify meaning in the text:

all capital letters enclosed in [ ] indicate a key name (either on the pop-up keyboard or the
external keyboard), such as [ENTER].

bold letters included in indicate text you can find on the screen, such as Clean.

bold letters indicate chapter titles, such as Chapter 1 Using This Manual.

All illustrations in this manual are provided as examples only. They may not necessarily reflect
your analyzer setup or data displayed.

1-4
Using This Manual

1.5 Symbols

You will find the following symbols in this manual:

When you see Then


Read the statement below the symbol. The statement is
alerting you to an operating hazard that can cause
personnel injury.
Read the statement below the symbol. The statement is
alerting you to a possibility of analyzer damage or
unreliable analysis results.
Read the statement below the symbol. The statement is
alerting you to information that requires your attention.

Read the statement below the symbol. The statement is


alerting you to a potentially biohazardous condition.

You may find the following symbols on the analyzer, reagents, controls or calibrators.

When you see It means

CAUTION, CONSULT ACCOMPANYING


DOCUMENTS.

BIOLOGICAL RISK

HIGH VOLTAGE

WARNING, LASER BEAM

WARNING, HOT SURFACE

PROTECTIVE EARTH (GROUND)

1-5
Using This Manual

EARTH (GROUND)

ALTERNATING CURRENT

BATCH CODE

USE BY

SERIAL NUMBER

CATALOG NUMBER (FOR CONTROLS)

DATE OF MANUFACTURE

MANUFACTURER

TEMPERATURE LIMITATION

CONSULT INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

IRRITATING SUBSTANCE

THE FOLLOWING DEFINITION OF THE


WEEE LABEL APPLIES TO EU MEMBER
STATES ONLY: THE USE OF THIS
SYMBOL INDICATES THAT THIS
PRODUCT SHOULD NOT BE TREATED
AS HOUSEHOLD WASTE. BY ENSURING
THAT THIS PRODUCT IS DISPOSED OF
CORRECTLY, YOU WILL HELP PREVENT

1-6
Using This Manual

BRINGING POTENTIAL NEGATIVE


CONSEQUENCES TO THE
ENVIRONMENT AND HUMAN HEALTH.
FOR MORE DETAILED INFORMATION
WITH REGARD TO RETURNING AND
RECYCLING THIS PRODUCT, PLEASE
CONSULT THE DISTRIBUTOR FROM
WHOM YOU PURCHASED THE
PRODUCT.

Be sure to observe the following precautions for the safety of patients, operators and yours
when you are servicing the analyzer.

1-7
Using This Manual

It is important for the laboratory that employs this equipment to carry out a
reasonable service/maintenance plan. Neglect of this may result in machine
breakdown or injury of human health.

Never use combustible gas (e.g. anesthetic) or combustible liquid (e.g.


ethanol) around the analyzer. Otherwise, the risk of explosion may exist.

Contacting exposed electronic components while the equipment is attached


to power can cause personal injury from electric shock or damage to
electronic components. Power down before removing covers to access
electronic components.

Connect the analyzer to a socket having sole fuse and protective switch. Do
not use the same fuse and protective switch with other equipment (e.g. life
supporting equipment). Otherwise, the equipment failure, over current or
impulse current that occurs at the startup moment may lead to tripping.

To prevent personal injury during the maintenance, keep your clothes, hairs
and hands from the moving parts, such as sample probe.

Possible mechanical movement of the warned position may lead to personal


injury during the normal operation, removal and maintenance.

Be sure to dispose of reagents, waste, samples, consumables, etc.


according to government regulations.

The reagents are irritating to eyes, skin and diaphragm. Wear proper
personal protective equipment (e.g. gloves, lab coat, etc.) and follow safe
laboratory procedures when handling them in the laboratory.

If the reagents accidentally spill on your skin, wash them off with plenty of
water and if necessary, go see a doctor; if the reagents accidentally spill into
your eyes, wash them off with plenty of water and immediately go see a
doctor.

1-8
Using This Manual

Improper maintenance may damage the analyzer. Maintain the analyzer


strictly as instructed by the service manual and inspect the analyzer
carefully after the maintenance.

For problems not mentioned in the service manual, contact Mindray


customer service department for maintenance advice.

To prevent personal injury or damage to equipment components, remove


metal jewelry before maintaining or servicing electronic components of the
equipment.

Electrostatic discharge may damage electronic components. If there is a


possibility of ESD damage with a procedure, then do that procedure at an
ESD workstation, or wear an antistatic wrist strap.

This equipment must be operated by skilled/trained professionals.

Samples, controls, calibrators and waste are potentially infectious. Wear


proper personal protective equipment (e.g. gloves, lab coat, etc.) and follow
safe laboratory procedures when handling them in the laboratory.

All the analyzer components and surfaces are potentially infectious.

Take proper protective measures for operation or maintenance.

The sample probe tip is sharp and may contain biohazardous materials.
Exercise caution to avoid contact with the probe when working around it.

1-9
2 System Structure

2.1 Introduction

Hardware

Hardware collects signals, controls and drives moving parts, and processes and displays
information. It mainly consists of the mother board, drive board, data board, power board, laser
control board, FS pre-amplification board, SS pre-amplification board, volumetric board,
indicator board and liquid-level detecting board.

Interface

The system mainly consists of two parts, the main unit (analyzer) and the external computer,
which are connected through the network port. Other connections are realized through the
interfaces of the external computer.

Software operating environment

The system software consists of the main unit software and the operation software. The main
unit software is operated on the data board inner the analyzer; the operation software is
operated under the WINDOWS platform of the external computer. The main unit software
analyzes the sequence, collects and identifies data. The operation software displays and prints
the results and stores them into the database, and realizes the interaction of the functions
including count, QC, calibration, maintenance, data management and communication, etc.

Fluidic System

The fluidic system indicates the tubing where reagents, samples and air pass in the analyzer.
The fluidic system controls the correlatively jointed fluidic parts in a set sequence by the
software and driving of the hardware to control the distribution and direction of the medium.

2-1
System Structure

2.2 Fluidic System


Refer to Chapter 4 Fluidic System of this manual

2.3 Hardware System


Refer to Chapter 5 Hardware System of this manual

2.4 Main Unit

Figure2-1 Front of the main unit

1---Power Indicator 2---Sample Probe


3---Aspirate Key

2-2
System Structure

Figure2-2 Back of the main unit

1 --- V-53D Diluent sensor connector 2 --- V-53D Diluent inlet


3 --- V-53 cleanser inlet 4 --- V-53LH Lyse inlet
5 --- V-53LEO()Lyse inlet 6 --- V-53LEO()Lyse Inlet
7 --- Waste outlet 8 --- Waste sensor connector
9 --- AC input 10 --- Network interface

2-3
System Structure

Figure2-3 Left side of the main unit

1--- Door Lock 2---Sample Probe


3--- Power switch

2-4
System Structure

Figure2-4 Right side of the main unit

1---Door Lock 2---Sample Probe

2-5
System Structure

Figure2-5 Front of the main unit (front cover removed)


1 --- Sampling Module 2 --- Aspirate Key
3 --- Sampling syringe assembly 4 --- Sample injection syringe assembly
5 --- Sheath fluid syringe assembly 6 --- Relieve valve assembly
7--- Fluidic valve

2-6
System Structure

Figure2-6 Left side of the main unit (left door removed)

1 --- Front door assembly 2 --- Diluent syringe assembly


3 --- Lyse syringe assembly 4 --- Pressure chamber assembly
5 --- Air pumps 6 --- Left door
7 --- liquid level detection unit 8 --- Valve assembly (2)
9 --- Valve assembly (1) 10 --- Power switch
11 --- Drive board 12 --- Data board
13 --- Mother board 14 --- Top cover

2-7
System Structure

Figure2-7 Right side of the main unit (right door removed)

1 --- Optical system 2 --- Fluidic valves


3 --- Isolation chamber 4 --- Sampling assembly
5 --- Volumetric unit 6 --- Fluidic valves
7 --- Vacuum chamber assembly 8 --- Right door
9 --- Waste pump assembly 10 --- Valve assembly (3)
11 --- Bath assembly 12 --- WBC reaction bath assembly
13 --- Pinch valve

2-8
System Structure

2.5 Software structure


The software system consists of the main unit software which operates on the data board inner
the analyzer and the operation software which operates under the WINDOWS platform of the
external computer. The main unit software analyzes sequence, collects data and calculates the
parameters. The operation software realizes the interaction of the functions including count,
QC, calibration, maintenance, data management and parameter setup, etc.

2.5.1 Menu structure


1. Shortcut button area
When switching to any screen, a guidance bar will always be displayed on the left of the
screen containing 8 frequently used shortcut buttons. Click them to perform the corresponding
operations. The menu structure of the shortcut buttons is shown in Figure2-8.

Figure2-8 Menu structure of the shortcut button area


2. Review screen
The Review menu has four submenus: Count, Table, Data Export and Compare. The Table
review includes the function of auto-backup, which will be performed automatically by the
software when the condition of backup is fulfilled. The menu structures of each screen of the
Review screen are shown below.

Count

The menu structure of the Count screen is shown in Figure2-9.

2-9
System Structure

Figure2-9 Menu structure of the Count screen


Table

The menu structure of the table review screen is shown in Figure2-10.

Figure2-10 Menu structure of the table review screen

2-10
System Structure

3. QC screen
The menu structure of the QC program is shown in Figure2-11.

QC Settings Save

Set Limits

Have Preset Values

Print

Run Start QC Run

Print

Pos./Total

Graph Delete

New Vial

Data Compare

Display Order

Calculate Preset Values

Save Preset Values

Outliers

Print

Pos./Total

Table Delete

Print

Communication

Data Backup

Data Export

History

Pos./Total

Figure2-11 Menu structure of the QC program

4. Service
The Service screen contains screens of Maintenance, Status, Self-test, Debug, Log,
Counter and Version and Config. Information. The menu structures of these screens are
shown below.

2-11
System Structure

Maintenance screen

The menu structure of the Maintenance screen is shown in Figure2-12.


Replace
Maintenance Diluent
Reagent
LEO(I) Lyse

LEO(II) Lyse

LH Lyse

Cleanser

All Reagents

Clean WBC Bath

RBC Bath

DIFF Bath

Flow Cell

Sample Probe

Maintain Unclog

Zap Apertures

Flush Apertures

Probe Cleanser Soak

Cleanser Soak

Soak DIFF Bath

Soak WBC Bath

Soak RBC Bath

Empty WBC Bath

Empty RBC Bath

Empty DIFF Bath


Maintain
the whole Fluidics Initialization
device
Clean Fluidics

Empty Fluidics

Prepare to Ship

Figure2-12 Menu structure of the Maintenance screen

Status screen

The menu structure of the Status screen is shown in Figure2-13.

2-12
System Structure

Figure2-13 Menu structure of the Status screen

Self-test screen

The menu structure of the Self-test screen is shown in Figure2-14.

2-13
System Structure

Diluent Syringe
Self-test Motor
Motor

Lyse Syringe Motor

Sample Injection
Syringe Motor
Sheath Fluid Syringe
Motor
Sampling Syringe
Motor
Sample Probe
Horizontal Motor

Sample Probe
Vertical Motor

Print

Valve Valve 1-15

Valve 21-39

All Valves

Print

WBC Volumetric
Others
Tube Filter

RBC Volumetric
Tube Filter

WBC Aperture
Voltage

RBC Aperture
Voltage

Count Time

Print

Figure2-14 Menu structure of the Self-test screen

Debug screen

The menu structure of the Debug screen is shown in Figure2-15.

2-14
System Structure

DIFF Bath
Debug Start
Sample Probe

Forward

Backward

Up

Down

Ok

Figure2-15 Menu structure of the Debug screen

Counter screen

The menu structure of the Counter screen is shown in Figure2-16.

Figure2-16 Menu structure of the Counter screen

Log screen

The menu structure of the Log screen is shown in Figure2-17

2-15
System Structure

Figure2-17 Menu structure of the Log screen

Version and Config. Information screen

The menu structure of the Version and Config. Information screen is shown in Figure2-18.
Version and
Config. Export
Information
Print

Close

Figure2-18 Menu structure of the Version and Config. Information screen

2-16
System Structure

5. Setup screen
The Setup screen contains screens of Gain, Data Format, Reagent, Auxiliary, Para.
Unit, Ref. Range, Print, Auto Maintenance, User and Password, Lab Info, Advanced,
Algorithmic parameter, Species Name and Diff Algorithm. The menu structure of the
Setup screen is shown in Figure2-19.

Setup Date Format

Reagent

Auxiliary

Para. Unit New

Ref. Range Edit

Print Delete

Communication Reset password

Gain Change password

Auto-maintain Close

User and Password

Lab Info.

Advanced Maintain

Algorithmic Parameter

Species Name

Diff Algorithm

Figure2-19 Menu structure of the Setup screen

6. Calibration screen
The menu structure of the Calibration screen is shown in Figure2-20.

Figure2-20 Menu structure of the Calibration screen

2-17
System Structure

7. Shutdown
The menu structure of SHUTDOWN is shown in Figure2-21.

SHUTDOWN Sleep

Shutdown

Figure2-21 Menu structure of SHUTDOWN

8. Exit
The menu structure of EXIT is shown in Figure2-22.

EXIT Logout

Exit

Figure2-22 Menu structure of EXIT

2.5.2 Passwords
The passwords are divided into three levels: common user, administrator and service engineer.
An administrator is enabled all authorities of a common user, and a service engineer is
enabled all authorities of an administrator. Tables below introduce the authorities enabled for
each password level.

Table2-1 Authorities enabled for common user level


Level Module Screen Authorities enabled
Common Run Sample All screens Users of three levels are all enabled the
User except the QC count authority.
Run and
Service
(Maintenance,
Status,
Self-test and
Debug)

2-18
System Structure

Review Count Data/Count, Saving of DIFF, Print, Data


Browse (the buttons of Validate, Edit
Result and Restore Result are available,
but when you click them, a message box
will pop up for authority identification.)
Saving of the Microscopic Exam. screen,
Print and Data Browsing.
TABLE Save, Print, Communication, Deselect,
Search, Trend Graph, CV, arrow buttons
above the Pos./Total control (the buttons
of Validate, Batch Validate, Edit Result
and Restore Result are available, but
when you click them, a message box will
pop up for authority identification.)
Data Export Data Export
Auto-backup Auto-backup
QC L-J QC setup: switch the file No. to browse file information of
different lot No.(but can not edit the QC settings)
L-J QC count: QC Run, Data browse and Print
L-J QC graph: New Vial, Data Compare, Display Order,
Calculate Preset Values, Save Preset Values, Outliers, Print
and Data browse function of the Pos./Total control.
L-J QC table: Print, Communication, Data Backup, Data
Export, History and Browse
Service Maintenance Replace Reagent, Clean, Maintain the
whole device, Maintain
Status Temperature&Pressure, Voltage&Current,
Sensor&Photocoupler, check the status
information of the Signal Collection
screen, export and print Current Screen
Status and All Status
Self-test Self-test for motors, valves and other items
and print the test results
Counter Check the statistics data of the counter,
print the data
Log Check, print and modify logs including Set
Paras, Other Logs and All Logs
Version and Check, export and print the information of
Config. the Version and Config. Information
Information screen

2-19
System Structure

Setup Date Format Date Format


Reagent Exp. Date and Lot No.
Enable or disable the prompt box in the
Predilute Mode
Method of Entry for Sample ID
Auxiliary
Prefix of the Sample ID
All the contents of the Other items of the
Auxiliary screen
Check the information of the User list
screen, but New, Edit, Delete and Reset
User and password are disabled.
Password When log in as common user level, the
password of the current login user can be
modified.
Lab Lab Information can be browsed but can
Information not be edited.
Shortcut Code Shortcut code can be browsed but
Shortcut Code operation including New, Edit and Delete
are disabled.
Calibration Calibration Browse and print the User Calibration
Factors Factors
Help Help Check the help information
SHUTDOWN Perform the Sleep and Shutdown
SHUTDOWN
procedures
EXIT EXIT Log out and exit the system

Table2-2 Authorities enabled for administrator level


Level Module Screen Authorities enabled
Administrator Run Sample All screens
except the QC
Run and
Service
(Maintenance,
Status,
Self-test and
Debug)
Review Graph Delete, Histogram Adjust., Validate, Edit
Result and Restore Result

2-20
System Structure

TABLE Validate, Batch Validate, Edit Result and


Delete
Data Export
Auto-backup
QC L-J QC setup: Set the QC files which have not obtained the
QC run results; set and save the Ref. range and Limits
L-J QC count: all functions
L-J QC graph: Delete
L-J QC table: Delete
Service Maintenance
Status Print sets
Self-test
Counter
Log Check, print and modify the Error Info. log
Version and
Config.
Information
Setup Authority setting items of the Auxiliary
screen
Para. Unit, Ref. Range, Print,,
General Setup
Communication, Gain, Automaintain,
check and set the parameters of each
screen
User and New, Edit, delete user, reset the passwords
Password of all users and change the own password
Lab
Check and edit the Lab Information
Information
Species Name Rename Species Name
Diff Algorithm Setting Diff Algorithm of custom species
Shortcut Code Shortcut Code New, Edit and Delete the shortcut code
Calibration Calibration Browse, print, save and restore the User
Factors Calibration Factors
Calibration in the OV-WB mode
Calibrator Calibrate one or more parameters among
WBC, RBC, HGB, MCV and PLT.
Help Help
SHUTDOWN SHUTDOWN
EXIT EXIT

2-21
System Structure

Table 2-3 Authorities enabled for service engineer level


Level Module Screen Authorities enabled
Service Run Sample All screens
Engineer except the QC
Run and
Service
(Maintenance,
Status,
Self-test and
Debug)
Review Graph Special Info.
TABLE Optical
Data Export
Auto-backup
QC
Service Maintenance Replace All Reagents
Empty WBC Bath, Empty RBC Bath and
Empty DIFF Bath at the Maintenance
screen
Status Export the Analyzer Information
Self-test
Counter Initialize the statistics of all items except
the number times of samples being run;
check the detail information of number of
times of effective samples being run, QC
and calibration.
Log Export Log; check, print and modify the log
of RunSequence
Debug Debug
Version and
Config.
Information
Setup Edit FS, SS and SF values of the Gain
screen; set the value for Auto prompt
General Setup
when n samples were run at the
Automaintain screen
User and
Password

2-22
System Structure

Lab
Information
Shortcut Code
Advanced Maintain
Species Name Rename Species
Diff Algorithm Setting Diff Algorithm of custom species
Calibration Browse and print the User Calibration
Factors; browse, print, save and restore
Calibration
the Factory Calibration Factors; Initialize
Factors
User Calibration Factors and Factory
Calibration Factors
1. Factory calibrator calibration in the
WB-CBC, WB-CBC+DIFF, PD-CBC and
PD-CBC+DIFF mode.
Calibrator
2. Calibrate one or more parameters
among WBC, RBC, HGB, MCV, PLT and
MPV.
Help Help
SHUTDOWN SHUTDOWN
EXIT EXIT

2-23
3 Instrument Installation and Software
Upgrade

3.1 Preparations

3.1.1 Purpose
Install the instrument properly as per the procedures introduced in this chapter.

3.1.2 Tools
Blade or clipper

Clamp used for locating the volumetric tube

USB flash drive

Pipette (200l)

Cross-headed screwdriver

The software copied in the U-drive must be the specified one for the
analyzer of the specified model. Otherwise, you can not proceed to install.

3.1.3 Accessories
Plastic test tube

Pipette

7m standard particle

Gloves

Tissues

Controls (high and normal level)

Do prepare the 7m standard particles firstly to proceed with the later


confirmation work of the optical gain.

3-1
Instrument Installation and Software Upgrade

3.2 Installation Requirements


3.2.1 Space Requirements
Check the site for proper space allocation. In addition to the space required for the main unit
itself, arrange for:

at least100 cm on both left and right sides;

at least 50 cm behind ;

enough room on or below the countertop to accommodate the Reagent Kit.

3.2.2 Power Requirements


1. Make sure the main unit is properly grounded. Before turning on the main unit, make sure
the input voltage meets the requirements.
2. Using pinboard may bring the electrical interference and the analysis results may be
unreliable. Please place the main unit near the electrical outlet to avoid using the
plug-board.
3. Please use the original electrical wire shipped with the main unit. Other electrical wire may
damage the analyzer or cause unreliable analysis results.
Voltage: A.C. 100V-240V
Input power: 300 VA
Frequency: 50/60 Hz

3.2.3 Environment Requirements


The installation environment of main unit must meet the following requirements:
1. Optimal operating temperature: 15 - 30
2. Optimal operating humidity: 30 % - 85 %
3. Atmospheric pressure: 70 kPa - 106 kPa
4. The environment should be as free as possible from dust, mechanical vibrations, loud
noises, pollution and electrical interference.
5. It is advisable to evaluate the electromagnetic environment prior to the operation of this
main unit. Make sure the electromagnetic interference is less than CLASS B. Do not use
this main unit in close proximity to sources of strong electromagnetic radiation.
6. Do not place the main unit near brush-type motors, flickering fluorescent lights, and
electrical contacts that regularly open and close.
7. Do not place the main unit on a slope.
8. The environment should have good ventilation. Do not place the main unit in direct sunlight
or in front of a source of heat or drafts.

3-2
Instrument Installation and Software Upgrade

Make sure the installation environment meets the above 8 requirements.


Otherwise, the performance of the main unit might be affected.

3.2.4 PC Configuration Requirements


1. Startup the computer, then right-click My Computer and select Properties to enter the
property screen shown in Figure 3-2. You can check the operation system and RAM of the
computer here. They should meet the following requirements:
Operation systemWindows XP Home/XP Professional + SP2 / SP3, Windows Vista
Home/Ultimate 32bit , Windows 7 Home/Ultimate 32bit .
RAM1024MB at least

Figure 3-1 Checking Properties of My computer

3-3
Instrument Installation and Software Upgrade

Operating system

RAM

Figure 3-2 System properties


2. Right-click the desktop and select Properties, and then click the Settings tag to enter
the screen shown in Figure 3-4. You can check the resolution of the display here. It should
meet the following requirements:
Resolution1024 x 768 or higher (adjust as shown in Figure )

Figure 3-3 Checking Properties of desktop

3-4
Instrument Installation and Software Upgrade

Screen resolution

Figure 3-4 Setting screen resolution


3. Double-click My Computer to enter the screen shown in Figure 3-5. You can check the
space available on each disk here. It should meet the following requirements:
Hard disk space4GB available on one disk at least.

Disk space

Figure 3-5 My computer


Then, close the above 3 dialog boxes.

3-5
Instrument Installation and Software Upgrade

The PC hardware configuration and operation system must meet the


foregoing requirements. Otherwise, the analyzer can not work properly.

3-6
Instrument Installation and Software Upgrade

3.3 Package Checking and Unpacking

3.3.1 Checks before unpacking


Please check if the package is intact before unpacking.

3.3.2 Unpacking Main Unit

1. The appearance of the main unit is shown in Figure 3-6. Cut off the binding belt before
unpacking.

Figure 3-6 External package of main unit


2. Cut off the binding belt and remove the wooden cover. Then, remove the accessory box
shown in the figure below.

3-7
Instrument Installation and Software Upgrade

Figure3-7 Remove wooden cover

3. Lift the carton to expose the main unit.

Figure3-8 Remove accessory box

4. Remove the protection foam from both sides of the main unit.

3-8
Instrument Installation and Software Upgrade

Figure3-9 Remove carton

5. Remove the plastic bag from the main unit. Grab the bottom of the main unit and lift it onto a
countertop. Note that the main unit must be lifted by at least two persons.

Figure 3-10 Lift main unit

When lifting the main unit, keep it as level as possible.

3.3.3 Checking packing list


Check the delivered components against the packing list to see if everything is delivered.

3-9
Instrument Installation and Software Upgrade

3.4 Removal and Installation


1. Open the right door of the main unit, remove the plastic cable tie vertically fixing the
sampling assembly and remove the clamp fixing the synchronous belt, as Figure 3-11
shows.

Figure 3-11 Remove the plastic cable tie and the clamp
2. Copy the installation files from the disk to the U drive. Then, plug the U drive to the USB
interface and then open the installation folder.
3. Double-click Setup.exe to install the software.
4. A progress bar shown in Figure 3-12 will pop up. Please wait while the software is
installing the components needed.

Figure 3-12 Installing the components needed

3-10
Instrument Installation and Software Upgrade

5. An installation directory box will pop up with the default directory: D:\Mindray\Auto
Hematology Analyzer. You can click Browse to change the directory if necessary. Then,
click Next to continue installing as shown in Figure 3-13.

Figure 3-13 Selecting directory

6. A progress bar shown in Figure 3-14 will pop up. Please wait while the software is being
installed.

Figure 3-14 Progress bar


7. When the copying operation of the software is finished, a process bar shown in
Figure 3-15 will pop up. Please wait while the software is performing post-installation
tasks.

Figure 3-15 Continuing installing


8. The message box shown in Figure 3-16 will pop up when the installation of the software is
finished. Click OK to close the message box and the entire procedure of the installation
/upgrade is finished.

3-11
Instrument Installation and Software Upgrade

Figure 3-16 Installation finished.

If it is found that the main unit software mismatches the PC software, you
should upgrade the main unit software as per the procedures specified in
3.11.2 to match it with the software of the PC-end.

9. Install the driver program of the printer properly on the PC.


10. The hematology analyzer consists of the IPU PC and the main unit as designed. Only
basic interactive keys are located on the main unit like the [Aspirate] key. The rest of the
operations are realized through the IPU PC. The IPU PC has two network interfaces, one
connecting the main unit and the other one may connect to other information devices (e.g.
LIS system) or the LAN of the hospital, which are used to export data. There are two icons
of Local Area Connection for the two network interfaces existed. follow the procedures to
configure the network interfaces of the IPU PC:
(1) Right click My Network Places and select Properties from the pop-up dialog box.

Figure 3-17 Right clicking Network neighbor


(2) Right click one of the network interfaces and select Properties. In the pop-up message
box, select the check box of Show icon in notification area when connected and Notify
me when this connection has limited or no connectivity, and then click OK. Repeat this
procedure to set the other network interface.

3-12
Instrument Installation and Software Upgrade

Figure 3-18 Connection properties


(3) At the Local Area Connection Properties screen, select Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)
and then click Properties. At the pop-up screen, select Use the following IP address, and
then enter 10.0.0.1 into the IP address box and 255.255.255.0 into the Subnet mask box,
as shown in Figure 3-19 .

Figure 3-19 Setting IP address

3-13
Instrument Installation and Software Upgrade

(4) Then, click OK to save all the settings.

Never set the Default gateway and DNS server for the network interface
(10.0.0.1) connecting the main unit. Otherwise, you may not access to the
network connecting the other network interface.

If other computers or network are connected to the IPU PC (through the


other network interface), be sure that the IP address 10.0.0.1 (used by the
IPU PC) or 10.0.0.2 (used by the main unit) is not applied to other computers
or computers in the other network.

11. The LIS computer is used to transmit data by connecting the IPU computer. Do as follows
to check and set the IP for the LIS computer.
(1) At the desktop of the LIS computer, right click My Network Places and select
Properties from the pop-up dialog box, as shown in Figure 3-20 .

Figure 3-20 Network Neighbor (LIS computer)


(2) Right click the Local Area Connection icon and select Properties, as shown in Figure
3-21 .

Figure 3-21 Connection properties

3-14
Instrument Installation and Software Upgrade

Then, the following box will pop up:

Figure 3-22 Connection properties (LIS computer)


(3) At the Local Area Connection Properties screen, double click Internet Protocol
(TCP/IP) to enter the following screen.

3-15
Instrument Installation and Software Upgrade

Figure 3-23 Setting IP address


(4) Check and record the IP address shown in the screen. It will be used to set the IP
information on the main unit.
(5) If the IP address is not displayed here, you should set it manually (do not set the gateway
and DNS server). After setting the IP address, the subnet mask will be generated automatically.
Then, click OK to save the settings.

The IP address you set here can not be 10.0.0.1 or 10.0.0.2.

3-16
Instrument Installation and Software Upgrade

3.5 Connections
1. See Figure 3-24 for connections of reagent and waste containers. Note that the V-53LEO(I)
lyse, V-53LEO(II) lyse, V-53LH lyse and the analyzer should be placed in a plane of the
same level, and the V-53D diluent, V-53 cleanser, and waste containers should be placed
under the countertop.

Figure 3-24 Connections of reagent and waste containers


Make sure the tubes are electrically isolated.
See Figure 3-25 for proper connections of reagent and waste containers. Note that the tube
connectors and their counterparts on the analyzer are of the same colors.

Figure 3-25 linking wires and lines

2. Locate the power inlet at the back of the main unit and connect the female end of the
power cable to the power inlet, and connect the three-pronged end of the power cable to a

3-17
Instrument Installation and Software Upgrade

power outlet.

Figure 3-26 Connection of PC and power supply

3. Connect the Main Unit with the IPU computer by a cross network cable, as shown in
Figure 3-27 .

Figure 3-27 Connecting the main unit and the IPU computer

Be sure to use the cross network cable to connect the analyzer and the IPU
computer.

The two ends of a cross network cable have no difference. You can plug
them to the main unit and the IPU computer respectively at will. Please see
appendix H for method of how to distinguish a cross network cable from a
direct-connected network cable.

4. There are two ways to connect the hematology analyzer and the LIS computer.

3-18
Instrument Installation and Software Upgrade

(1) Connect the hematology analyzer with the LIS computer by a cross network cable, as
shown in Figure 3-28 .

Figure 3-28 Connecting the main unit and the LIS computer

Be sure to use the cross network cable to connect the analyzer and the LIS
computer.

The two ends of a cross network cable can be randomly plugged into the
two computers respectively.

(2) Connect the IPU computer to the LAN of the hospital, as shown in Figure 3-29 .

Figure 3-29 Connecting the IPU computer and LAN

Be sure to use the direct-connected network cable to connect the IPU


computer to the LAN.

The two ends of a direct-connected network cable can be randomly plugged


into the IPU computer and the network devices (HUB, Exchanger, Router,
etc.) respectively.

3-19
Instrument Installation and Software Upgrade

Adopt one of the two ways to finish the network connection according to the condition of the
hospital or doctors requirement.

5. Connect the printer with the IPU computer with specified cable and connect the power
cord properly.

3-20
Instrument Installation and Software Upgrade

3.6 Start-up
3.6.1 Inspection before Startup

Check and make sure the marks on the relieve valve are on the same line, as shown in Figure
3-30. Change the relieve valve if the marks are not on the same line.

Marks on relieve valve

Figure 3-30 Marks on relieve valve


1. Check and make sure the sampling tube and the two pipes connected the probe wipe are
not bended and clogged at the place of the flatten cable clamp (at top of the sampling
assembly), as shown in Figure 3-31.

Check and make


sure the sampling
tube and the two
pipes connected the
probe wipe are not
bended and clogged
here.
Figure 3-31 Sampling and probe wipe tubing

2. Before starting up, remove the right door of the analyzer, and then check and make sure
the tubes connecting the V25, V26 and the tee-connector of the volumetric tube are not
bended and clogged, as Figure 3-32 shows.

3-21
Instrument Installation and Software Upgrade

Check and make sure


the tubes connecting
the V25, V26 and the
tee-connector of the
volumetric tube are not
bended and clogged

Figure 3-32 Tubing free from bending and clogging


3. Check and make sure the thick 50 tube connecting the V27 is not bended and clogged, as
Figure 3-33 shows.

Check and make


sure the thick 50
tube connecting the
V27 is not bended
and clogged

Figure 3-33 Tubing free from bending and clogging


4. Check and make sure the two-way connector and the tee connector connecting tube 1 are
in the same distance towards the pinch valve, as shown in Figure 3-34 .

3-22
Instrument Installation and Software Upgrade

Two-way
connector Tube 1

Tee connector

Figure 3-34 Checking the pinch valve

3.6.2 Start up for the first time

1. Turn on the main unit, wait a moment and then a prompt will appear
on the task bar. It means the local-connection-related network interface connects the main

unit already. Similarly, if the other prompt appears on the task


bar, it means the local-connection-2-related network interface doesnt connect the main
unit, and it is available to connect the LAN of the hospital. If the two prompts are all

then, you should unplug the network cable connecting the


main unit from the IPU computer, and then plug it into the other network interface; then,
plug the network cable connecting the LIS computer into the rest network interface.
2. Double click the Auto Hematology Analyzer icon on the desktop of the IPU computer to
start up the software. Then, enter the user name service and the password Se s700
(note: there is a space between e and s) into the login box, as shown in Figure 3-35 ,
and then click OK to initialize the analyzer.

3-23
Instrument Installation and Software Upgrade

Figure 3-35 Logging in


3. During the initialization, a dialog box Skip fluidic initialization? will pop up. Click No to
continue the initialization.

Figure 3-36 Skip fluidic initialization?


4. When initialization is finished, click Menu Setup Communication to enter the
screen shown below. Set the IP address and Port here, and then click OK to save the
settings.

3-24
Instrument Installation and Software Upgrade

Figure 3-37 Communication setup

The IP address you set here should be the one of the LIS computer
connecting the IPU computer. The Port you set here should be the
interception port of the LIS computer. The IP address of external server
cannot be 10.0.0.1 and 10.0.0.2, and format like 10.0.0.* is not recommended.

5. Before transmitting data, make sure the LIS computer connecting the IPU computer is
working. Thus, the IPU program could locate the destination for transmitting.
6. If the connection is established between the IPU computer and the LIS computer, the LIS
icon in the IPU screen will turn to colorful, as shown in Figure 3-38, indicating you can start
transmitting data now.

Figure 3-38 LIS communication

3-25
Instrument Installation and Software Upgrade

The data communication will be terminated automatically once the IPU


software is closed. The LIS computer is the server terminal and the IPU
software is the customer terminal. The IPU software keeps trying to connect
after starting up, if it is intercepted correctly by the server terminal, then the
connection will be established and ready for communication.

The IPU computer can connect LIS computer through cross network cable;
connect LIS computer in the same network through devices like HUBs or
exchangers; connect LIS computer in a different network through devices
like routers.

3.6.3 Inspection after Startup


1. Click MenuServiceVersion and Config. Information, as shown in Figure 3-39
to enter the version and configuration information screen shown in Figure 3-40.

Figure 3-39 Menu option

3-26
Instrument Installation and Software Upgrade

Figure 3-40 Version and config. Info.


2. Boot Software, Application Software, Operating System, Driver Board FPGA, Driver Board
MCU, Data board FPGA, Fluidics Sequence and Algorithm Library, as shown in Figure
3-40, and then close the message box.
3. Do the background count once again. Check if there is fluid hanging on the exterior wall or
the tip of the sample probe. If the fluid were found, find out the cause and remove the error.
Then, do the background count again until there is no fluid.

Sample probe

Figure 3-41 Observing the sample probe

4. Use the cross-headed screw driver to remove the screws fixing the shielding cover of the
bath, and then remove the shielding cover as shown in Figure 3-42. Then, do the
background count once. Check and make sure there is no spill when WBC and RBC bath
dispensing fluid but the bath bubbles normally during the count, as shown in Figure 3-43.
Otherwise, you should find out the cause and remove the error.

3-27
Instrument Installation and Software Upgrade

M3X8 assembled scrwes

Figure 3-42 Removing bath shielding cover

Two dispensing
tubes of WBC bath Dispensing tubes of
RBC bath

Bubbling area of
WBC bath Bubbling area of
RBC bath

Figure 3-43 Observing when the bath dispensing fluid and bubbling
5. Check and make sure there is no fluid hanging in the WBC and RBC volumetric tube.
Otherwise, change the volumetric tube accordingly, as shown in Figure 3-44.

3-28
Instrument Installation and Software Upgrade

Liquid level of WBC Liquid level of RBC


volumetric tube volumetric tube

Figure 3-44 Observing liquid level of volumetric tubes

3-29
Instrument Installation and Software Upgrade

3.7 Setup and Adjustment

3.7.1 Setting Parameters


1. At the main screen, click MenuSetupReagent to enter the reagent screen where
you can set the expiration date for the reagents, as shown in Figure 3-45.

Figure 3-45 Clicking Reagent


2. Set the expiration date for the following reagents: Diluent, LEO (I) Lyse, LEO (II)
Lyse, LH Lyse and Cleanser.

3-30
Instrument Installation and Software Upgrade

Figure 3-46 Setting the expiration date

3. At the main screen, click MenuSetupAdvanced to enter the screen shown in


Figure 3-48.

Figure 3-47 Entering Advance screen

3-31
Instrument Installation and Software Upgrade

Figure 3-48 Advance screen


4. Confirm whether the WBC and RBC count mean time that you recorded previously
complies with the time displayed in the screen, as shown in Figure 3-48. Enter the
recorded mean time if the time displayed doesnt comply with the recorded one. Then, use
the cross-headed screw driver to re-assemble the screws, fixing the shielding cover of the
volumetric board and the bath.

3.7.2 Adjusting Position


1. Press the [Aspirate] key. Then, the analyzer will run a background count once.
2. At the Count screen, click the Special info. button as shown in Figure 3-49 to enter the
special information screen shown in Figure 3-50.

3-32
Instrument Installation and Software Upgrade

Figure 3-49 Clicking Special info.

Figure 3-50 Special info. screen


3. Firstly, make sure the DIFF pulse data length is less than 200. Otherwise, do the
background count till the DIFF pulse data length is less than 200, as shown in Figure 3-50.
Use the cross-headed screw driver to remove the shielding cover of the volumetric board,
as shown in Figure 3-51. Make sure the WBC Start signal delay is within [2.5, 3] and the
RBC Start signal delay is within [4, 4.5]. If they are found out of the limit, use the
positioning fixture to measure the distance between the tee connector under the
volumetric tube and the lower fixing plate of the volumetric board, and according to the
WBC and RBC Start signal delay to fine adjust the distance, as shown in Figure 3-52.
When WBC start signal delay is less than 2.5s, fine adjust the WBC volumetric tube
downwards; When WBC start signal delay is more than 3s, fine adjust the WBC volumetric
tube upwards; When RBC start signal delay is less than 4s, fine adjust the RBC volumetric

3-33
Instrument Installation and Software Upgrade

tube downwards; When RBC start signal delay is more than 4.5s, fine adjust the RBC
volumetric tube upwards. When the WBC and RBC Start signal delay are within the limit,
do the background count three times consecutively to check and make sure the two values
are within the range every time, and then record the values of the last time. Meanwhile,
check the WBC and RBC count time and calculate the mean time. Then, close the special
info. message box.

Be sure to adjust the position of the volumetric tube by your hand directly.
Never pull the tee connector hard to adjust, otherwise, the tee connector
may leak.

Two M3X8 screws

Figure 3-51 Removing the shielding cover of the volumetric board

Adjust distance

Lower fixing plate of


the volumetric board

Tee connector under


the volumetric tube
Figure 3-52 Distance under the volumetric tube

3-34
Instrument Installation and Software Upgrade

3.8 Testing Other Functions


Click MenuSetupPrint to enter the print screen. You can set the connection between
the IPU computer and the printer here, as shown in Figure 3-53.

Figure 3-53 Print Setup

3-35
Instrument Installation and Software Upgrade

3.9 Confirming Gain

3.9.1 HGB blank voltage


After the transportation and initialization, the HGB blank voltage required may differ from the
factory settings.
Thus, confirming and adjusting the HGB blank voltage through gain setup is necessary.
1. Entering the setup screen
At the main screen, click Menu SetupGain to enter the screen.

Figure 3-54 Setup screen


2. Confirming the HGB gain
You can adjust the HGB blank voltage by adjusting the HGB gain. The HGB blank voltage shall
be set to 4.48-4.52 V, 4.50V is favorable. Do as follows to adjust:
At the Gain screen, click the adjusting button of the HGB current value to set the HGB
blank voltage to 4.48-4.52 V, 4.50V is favorable.

3.9.2 Confirming Optical System


After the transportation, the gain of the DIFF channel of the optical system may differ from the
factory settings.

3-36
Instrument Installation and Software Upgrade

Thus, adjusting the gain of the optical system is necessary. Do as follows to adjust:

1. At the Count screen, select Next Sample as Dog - WB - CBC+DIFF and then perform
the background count once and make sure the background results meet the specified
requirement.
2. At the Count screen, select the work mode as Dog - WB - CBC+DIFF. Then, prepare
the standard particle sample at the ratio that dispenses 3 drops of standard particles into
1ml distilled water. Then, well mix the sample and run the sample once.

Be sure to use the distilled water to prepare the standard particle sample.
Prepared standard particle sample should be run within 12 hours.

3. When finish running, enter the Table screen and select the standard particle sample just
run, and then click the Optical button.

Figure 3-55 Table review screen


4. At the Optical screen, click the Calculate button. Check and make sure the FS Gravity
Center Position is within (16.5619.54), SS Gravity Center Position within (100.18108.3),
FS 0.1max width no more than 6.79, and SS 0.1max width no more than 16.09. Then click
"Close".

3-37
Instrument Installation and Software Upgrade

Figure 3-56 Optical screen

5. If the peak position and 0.1max width of the standard particles do not meet the
requirements, calibrate the optical gain as per Section 3.9.3 Gain of Optical System.

3.9.3 Gain of Optical System


1At the Count screen, select the work mode as Dog - WB - CBC+DIFF. Then, prepare the
standard particle sample at the ratio that dispenses 3 drops of standard particles into 1ml
distilled water. Then, well mix the sample and run the sample once.

Be sure to use the distilled water to prepare the standard particle sample.
Prepared standard particle sample should be run within 12 hours.

2When finish running, enter the Table screen and select the standard particle sample just
run, and then click the Optical button.

3-38
Instrument Installation and Software Upgrade

Figure 3-57 Table review screen

3At the Optical screen, click the Calculate button. Then enter the target of the standard
particle into the peak target of FS and SS of particle 1, FS taget:18.1;SS target:104.2. The
analyzer will automatically calculate and record the proper gain for FS and SS. Click the
Gain Setup button to apply all species FS and SS values. Click Close to exit the optical
screen.

3-39
Instrument Installation and Software Upgrade

Figure 3-58 Optical screen

4Click MenuSetupGain.

Figure 3-59 Gain setup screen

3-40
Instrument Installation and Software Upgrade

3.10 Calibration and Performance Test

3.10.1 Background Count


Back to the Count screen and perform the background count in Dog WB - CBC+DIFF
mode. The background results shall meet the specified requirement: WBC:0.1109/L,
RBC:0.031012/L, HGB:1g/L, HCT:0.5%, PLT:5109/L.

3.10.2 Carryover
Follow the procedure 3 instructed in section 9.3.1 of the Operators Manual to make sure the
carryover of the analyzer meets the requirements listed in the table below:

Parameter Carryover

WBC 0.5

RBC 0.5

HGB 0.6

HCT 0.5

PLT 1.0

3.10.3 Reproducibility
In the Dog WB - CBC+DIFF mode, make sure the reproducibility of the analyzer meets the
requirements specified in Appendix B 5.4 of the Operators Manual
The CV requirements for whole blood mode:

Para. Condition CV% / absolute deviation d (WB)


WBC (6.00-15.00)109/L 3.0
12
RBC (3.50-10.00)10 /L 2.0%
HGB (110-180) g/L 2.0%
MCV (60-95) fL 1.0%
9
PLT (150-500)10 /L 6.0%
The CV requirements for predilute mode:

Para. Condition CV% / absolute deviation d (PD)


WBC (6.00-15.00)109/L 4.0
12
RBC (3.50-10.00)10 /L 3.0%
HGB (110-180) g/L 3.0%
MCV (60-95) fL 1.0%
9
PLT (150-500)10 /L 8.0%

3-41
Instrument Installation and Software Upgrade

3.10.4 Calibration
1. Click MenuCalibration, and then click Calibrator to enter the screen. Select the
calibration mode as Whole Blood; enter the lot No. and the expiration date of the
calibrator, and then enter the WBC, RBC, HGB, MCV, PLT and WBCO targets of the
calibrator into the table. Enter the WBC target value in the WBCO target field (the WBC
and WBCO target values are the same).

Figure 3-60 Calibration (WB)


2. Click the Start button.

3-42
Instrument Installation and Software Upgrade

Figure 3-61 Calibration (WB)

3. Well mix the calibrator and then open the cap and present the calibrator under the sample
probe, making sure the sample probe is plunged into the calibrator, and then press the
aspirate key. When you hear the beep, remove the calibrator. The analyzer will start
running automatically. Run the calibrator consecutively for 12 times.

Be sure to immerse the tip of the sample probe into the calibrator.

3-43
Instrument Installation and Software Upgrade

Figure 3-62 Calibration (WB)


When Calibrator calibration done! pops up, Click OK.
When you switch to another screen, the Note dialog box will pop up.

3-44
Instrument Installation and Software Upgrade

Figure 3-63 Calibration (WB)


Click Yes to save the new calibration factors while closing the message box and switching to
another screen.
Click No to close the message box without saving and switch to another screen.
Click Cancel close the message box.

4. Click Diluent and then present the tube under the sample probe, and then press the
aspirate key to start dispensing the diluent, as Figure 3-64 shows. Dispense the diluent
into the tube for 6 times consecutively.

Figure 3-64 Dispensing diluent


5. Well mix the calibrator. Set the pipette to 120L and then aspirate the calibrator.
6. Clean the tip of the pipette by lint-free tissue, and then dispense the aspirated calibrator
into the tube loading the diluent and well mix it by the pipette, as Figure 3-65 shows.

3-45
Instrument Installation and Software Upgrade

Figure 3-65 Mix the sample


7. Back to the Calibrator screen, and then select the calibration mode as Predilute and
enter the lot No. and the expiration date of the calibrator, and then enter the WBC, RBC,
HGB, MCV, PLT and WBCO targets of the calibrator into the table. Enter the WBC target
value in the WBCO target field (the WBC and WBCO target values are the same).

Figure 3-66 Calibration (PD)

3-46
Instrument Installation and Software Upgrade

8. Click the Start button.

Figure 3-67 Calibration (PD)


9. Present the calibrator well mixed as instructed by procedure 6 under the sample probe,
making sure the sample probe is plunged into the calibrator, and then press the aspirate
key, as Figure 3-68 shows. When you hear the beep, remove the calibrator. The analyzer
will start running automatically. Run the calibrator consecutively for 12 times.

Be sure to immerse the tip of the sample probe into the calibrator.

Figure 3-68 Predilute calibrator sampling

3-47
Instrument Installation and Software Upgrade

Figure 3-69 Calibration (PD)


When Calibrator calibration done! pops up, Click OK.
When you switch to another screen, the Note dialog box will pop up.

3-48
Instrument Installation and Software Upgrade

Figure 3-70 Calibration (PD)


Click Yes to save the new calibration factors while closing the message box and switching to
another screen.
Click No to close the message box without saving and switch to another screen.
Click Cancel close the message box.

3-49
Instrument Installation and Software Upgrade

3.11 Software upgrade

3.11.1 Upgrading the PC installed software


1. Release the Installation package on the disk and copy them to the U drive. Plug the U
drive to the USB interface and open the folder containing the installation package. Double
click the setup.exe to start the installation, a progress bar will pop up as shown in Figure
3-71 Please wait when software is installing components needed.

Figure 3-71 Installing components needed


2. At the pop-up box shown in Figure 3-72, select Upgrade and click Next to upgrade the
program. (If you need to install the software as a new one, select Install and click Next).

Figure 3-72 Upgrading database

3-50
Instrument Installation and Software Upgrade

3. Then, a progress bar shown in Figure 3-73 will appear. Pleas wait when software is
copying files.

Figure 3-73 Copying files


4. After the copying operation is finished, a progress bar will pop up when software is
performing post-installation operations.

Figure 3-74 Upgrade complete


5. When the upgrade is finished, a dialog box shown in Figure 3-75 will pop up. Click OK to
complete the upgrade of the PC installed software.

Figure 3-75 Upgrade complete

3.11.2 Upgrading the software of the main unit (analyzer)


1. Click Start All Programs Auto Hematology Analyzer software Analyzer
Upgrade, as shown in Figure 3-76, and then a message shown in Figure 3-77 will pop up.
Click Analyzer Upgrade and a login message box will pop up. Enter the user name:
service, and password: Se s700, and then click OK, as shown in Figure 3-78.

3-51
Instrument Installation and Software Upgrade

Figure 3-76 Clicking Analyzer Upgrade

Figure 3-77 Analyzer Upgrade message box

3-52
Instrument Installation and Software Upgrade

Figure 3-78 Login box


2. If the software version is lower than 1.5(EDH002), Upgrade Preparing operation is
needed. Please wait until the operation is finished. Then follow the pop-up message to
restart the analyzer.

Figure 3-79 Upgrade Preparing finished.


3. An upgrade directory message box will then pop up. Click Browse, and then select the
update folder of the main unit upgrade files, and then click OK, as shown in Figure 3-80.
Then, click OK in the pop-up message box, as shown in Figure 3-81. Then, the message
box as shown in Figure 3-82 will pop up, click OK to enter the screen shown in Figure
3-83, where you can select the upgrade items, and then click OK.

3-53
Instrument Installation and Software Upgrade

Figure 3-80 Selecting upgrade files

Figure 3-81 Message box after selecting the upgrade files

Figure 3-82 Note

3-54
Instrument Installation and Software Upgrade

Figure 3-83 Upgrade items screen


4. Then, the selected items will be upgraded automatically, as shown in Figure 3-84. Please
wait for moment. When finish upgrading, a message box will pop up to ask you to restart
the main unit as shown in Figure 3-85, click OK to close it.

Figure 3-84 Progress bar

3-55
Instrument Installation and Software Upgrade

Figure 3-85 Upgrade complete

5. Then, restart the main unit to complete the upgrade.

Never try to delete the files under ftp://10.0.0.2/3101 before upgrading.

Do not cut off the power supply of the analyzer during upgrading.

3-56
4 Fluidic System

4.1 Introduction of Fluidic Parts

4.1.1 Sample probe


Aspirates and dispenses the blood sample

4.1.2 Probe Wipe


Washes the interior and exterior of the sample probe

4.1.3 Pumps
P1: provides pressure for the pressure chamber to generate bubbles.
P2: empties the DIFF bath and vacuum chamber and creates vacuum.
P3: empties the probe wipe, WBC bath and RBC bath.

4.1.4 Syringes

Aspiration-Syringe: full volume 100 l; it aspirates and dispenses samples and aspirates
the second diluted sample.
Diluent-Syringe: full volume 12ml; it dispenses diluent into the WBC and RBC bath and
supplies the diluent to the probe wipe.
Lyse-Syringe: full volume 2.5ml; 3 syringes are driven by a motor; it dispenses M-53Leo
(I), M-53Leo (II) and M-53H.
Sheath-Syringe: full volume 12ml; it dispenses the sheath into the flow cell, cleans the
flow cell and DIFF bath, and is also be used for sample preparation.
Sample-Syringe: full volume 250l; it dispenses the sample into the flow cell.

4.1.5 Valves

Fluidic valve: turns on and off by electromagnetic force; controls the fluidic or air flow
direction.
Pinch valve: turns on and off by electromagnetic force; starts/stops the fluidic flow.
Pressure switch: alarms when the pressure inside the tubing exceeds 1.5Bar

4-1
Fluidic System

4.1.6 Baths

WBC bath: consists of a front bath, back bath and aperture. The WBC sample mixes and
reacts here and it is used for the measurement of HGB and WBC.
RBC bath: consists of a front bath, back bath and aperture. The RBC sample mixes and
reacts here and it is used for the measurement of RBC/PLT.
DIFF bath: DIFF sample mixes and reacts here.
Vacuum chamber: creates and stores stable vacuum for counting the WBC and RBC by
impedance method; cleans the back bath and empties the volumetric tube.
Pressure chamber: creates and stores stable pressure to generate bubbles for the baths.
WBC isolation chamber: provides air buffer to isolate outside interference
RBC isolation chamber: provides air buffer to isolate outside interference

4.1.7 Volumetric tube

WBC volumetric tube: volume 500ul; it measures the volume of the WBC sample
RBC volumetric tube: volume 300ul; it measures the volume of the RBC sample

4.1.8 Filters

Filter of WBC volumetric tube: it filters the air entered the WBC volumetric tube
Filter of RBC volumetric tube: it filters the air entered the RBC volumetric tube
P1 filter: it filters the air entered the air pump.

4-2
Fluidic System

4.2 Fluidic System

4.2.1 Reagent volume required

Sample analysis for a single sample each time


2 analysis modes: Open vial-whole blood mode and open vial-predilute mode.

Table 4-1 Reagent volume required when running samples


Volume of single analysis
Reagents Name
CBC+DIFF CBC
Diluent V -53D Diluent 45mL 30mL
V -53LEO(I) Lyse 1.8ml 0
Lyse V -53LEO(II) Lyse 0.15ml 0
V -53LH Lyse 0.5ml

Normal startup function (excluding background)


Reagents volume required:

Table 4-2 Reagents volume required when starting up normally


Reagents Name Volume of normal startup
Diluent V -53D Diluent 89ml
V -53LEO(I) Lyse 0
Lyse V -53LEO(II) Lyse 0
V -53LH Lyse 2ml
Cleanser V -53 Cleanser 0

Abnormal startup function (excluding background)


Reagents volume required:

Table 4-3 reagents volume required when starting up abnormally


Reagents Name Volume of abnormal startup
Diluent V -53D Diluent 172ml
V -53LEO(I) Lyse 0
Lyse V -53LEO(II) Lyse 0
V -53LH Lyse 2ml
Cleanser V -53 Cleanser 0

Starting up a drained system (after the Prepare to Ship procedure has be done)(excluding
startup background)

4-3
Fluidic System

Reagents volume required:

Table 4-4 reagents volume required for starting up a drained system (after the Prepare to
Ship procedure has been done)
Volume of starting up a
drained system (after the
Reagents Name
prepare to ship procedure
has been done)
Diluent V -53D Diluent 207ml
V -53LEO(I) Lyse 12ml
Lyse V -53LEO(II) Lyse 12ml
V -53LH Lyse 12ml
Cleanser V -53 Cleanser 8ml

Normal shutdown function


Reagents volume required:

Table 4-5 reagents volume required when normally shutting down


Reagents Name Volume of normal shutdown
Diluent V -53D Diluent 53ml
V -53LEO(I) Lyse 0
Lyse V -53LEO(II) Lyse 0
V -53LH Lyse 0
Cleanser V -53 Cleanser 29ml

4-4
Fluidic System

4.2.2 Fluidic System Drawing

Figure 4-1 Fluidic system (Whole Blood Mode)

Figure 4-2 Fluidic system (Predilute Mode)

4-5
Fluidic System

4.2.3 WBC Measurement Procedures

WBC Count/BASO channel

The reagents used include:


LH Lyse: it lyses erythrocytes and platelets and separates basophiles from other WBCs.
Diluent: it is used for cleaning and provides the environment for reaction and measurement.
Principles: Electrical Impedance Method
Parameters: WBC, BASO# and BASO%
Diagrams: WBC histogram
Dilute ratio: 1:501
Metering volume: 500
Function description: 6l blood sample, 2.5ml diluent and 0.5ml LH Lyse are mixed in the
bath, and then they react. After reaction, the sample flows to the back bath via the
aperture, driven by the vacuum, and the blood cells are counted when passing through
the aperture. The volume of the sample is measured by the volumetric tube.

DIFF channel

The reagents used include:


LEO (I) and LEO (II): they lyse RBCs and differentiate WBCs into 4 sub-populations.
Diluent: cleans the fluidic system and provides sheath.
Principles: flow cytometry and semiconductor laser scatter
Parameters: MONO#, MONO%, LYMPH#, LYMPH %, NEUT#, NEUT%, EOS# and
EOS%
Diagrams: 4-DIFF scattergram
Dilute ratio: 1:136
Metering volume: 131l
Function description: 0.6ml Leo (I) is dispensed into the bath as the initial volume, and
then 10l blood sample and 0.6ml Leo (I) are dispensed. After the sample is well mixed
and reacts with the reagent for a while, 0.15ml Leo (II) is dispensed. After the sample
reacts with the reagents for a while, the sample is driven to the bottom of the flow cell and
the sheath flow is enabled. Then the sample is dispensed into the flow cell by the sample
syringe for measurement.

4-6
Fluidic System

4.2.4 RBC/PLT Measurement Procedures

RBC/PLT channel

The reagents used include:


Diluent: dilutes samples, washes, provides a conductive environment and processes the cells
Principles: Electrical Impedance Method
Parameters: RBC and PLT
Diagrams: RBC histogram and PLT histogram
Dilute ratio: 1:40000
Metering volume: 300l
Function description: xxl sample dilution (y:y) is aspirated by the sample probe from the
WBC bath. The sample probe then moves to the RBC bath and mixes the sample with
2.5ml diluent to dilute the sample to the ratio of 1:40000. Then, the mixed sample is driven
into the back bath through the aperture by the vacuum, and the blood cells are counted
when passing through the aperture. The volume of the sample is measured by the
volumetric tube.

4.2.5 HGB Measurement Procedures


HGB channel

The reagents used include:


Diluent: dilutes samples and washes
LH lyse: lyses the red blood cells and combines the hemoglobin
Principles: Colorimetry
Parameters: HGB
Dilute ratio: 1:500
The HGB unit calculates the concentration of HGB by comparing the light passing through
the sample with the blank reference reading.

4-7
Fluidic System

4.3 Sequence of Whole Blood CBC+DIFF


Measurement

4.3.1 Sampling and dispensing procedures


A. Aspirating samples and dispensing samples into the DIFF bath
20l sample is aspirated by the aspiration syringe from the sample tube, and then the
sample probe ascends while its exterior is being cleaned.
The sample probe moves to above the DIFF bath.
The sample probe descends into the DIFF bath and dispenses 10l sample.

B. First Diluting
The sample probe ascends from the DIFF bath, meanwhile the probe exterior is cleaned.
The sample probe moves to above the WBC bath
The sample probe descends into the WBC bath, and then dispenses 10l sample. The
dispensed sample is diluted by the 2.5ml diluent that is already there to form the 1:417.7
dilution.

C. Cleaning the residual sample


The sample probe ascends from the WBC bath, meanwhile the probe exterior is cleaned.
The sample probe dispenses diluent into the probe wipe from the top to wash off the residual
sample.
The sample probe descends again into the WBC bath and aspirates the diluted sample.

D. RBC second diluting


The sample probe ascends from the WBC bath, meanwhile the probe exterior is cleaned.
The sample probe moves above the RBC bath.
The sample probe descends into the RBC bath, and then dispenses 1ml diluted sample. The
dispensed sample is diluted by the 1.5ml that is already in the bath to form the 1:20000
dilution.

E. Sample probe returning to home position


The sample probe ascends from the RBC bath, meanwhile the probe exterior is cleaned.
The sample probe returns to the home position.

4-8
Fluidic System

A B

C D

Figure 4-3 Dispensing procedures of sample probe

4-9
Fluidic System

4.3.2 DIFF Channel


Cleaning the reaction bath before dispensing samples0 - 6s

During this period:


1. The DIFF bath is drained. Then, 0.6ml LEO (I) Lyse is dispensed into the DIFF bath and
then the bath is drained again. The sheath syringe and sample syringe aspirate the
diluent.
2. During 0-1.5s, valve V38 is energized and waste pump 2 operates to drain the DIFF bath.
3. During 3-4s, valve 05 is energized and the lyse syringe dispenses 0.6ml LEO (I) Lyse into
the DIFF bath to clean it.
4. During 4-6s, valve V38 is energized and waste pump 2 operates to drain the DIFF bath
and then the DIFF bath is ready to receive sample.
5. Valve 39 is pinched. The sheath syringe and sample syringe aspirate diluent respectively.

Sample dispensing, mixing and DIFF sample preparation (6-19.8s)

During this period:


1. Dispensing LEO (I) Lyse for the first time: valve V05 is energized and 0.6ml pre-heated
LEO (I) Lyse is dispensed into the DIFF bath via the 2.5ml lyse syringe.
2. Sample dispensing and mixing: The 100ul aspiration syringe dispenses 10ul sample into
the DIFF bath and then valve V05 is energized, and then the 2.5ml lyse syringe dispenses
0.6ml pre-heated LEO (I) Lyse into the DIFF bath again.
3. Mixing by bubbling: valve V09 is energized to mix the sample with the LEO(I) lyse by
bubbling.
4. Dispensing LEO (II) Lyse: valve V06 is energized and 0.15ml pre-heated LEO (II) Lyse is
dispensed into the DIFF bath via the 2.5ml Lyse syringe.
5. Mixing sample by bubbling: valve 09 is energized to mix the sample by bubbling.
6. DIFF sample preparation: valve V39 is de-energized to open the path between the DIFF
bath and the syringe. Valve 22 is engerized and valve 23 keeps de-energized. The
sheath syringe aspirates 1.2ml sample from the DIFF bath.
When the sample preparation is done, the status of the fluidic system of the DIFF unit is shown
in Figure 4-4. The tubing highlighted in red is the part that holds the sample.

The sheath flow of the DIFF channel and the measurement (19.8-40.5s)

During this period:


1. Sheath fluid forming: V23 and V24 are engergized. The sheath syringe dispenses the
diluent into the flow cell at a certain speed to form the sheath.
2. Dispensing the sample at a high speed: The sample syringe dispenses the sample into the
flow cell at a high speed.
3. Measurement: when the sample fluid is stable, the sample syringe dispenses the sample

4-10
Fluidic System

into the flow cell at a low speed while the sheath syringe dispenses the diluent into the flow
cell to surround the sample. Thus, the sheath flow passes through the flow cell at a stable
speed for measurement.
The fluidic system status of this period is shown in Figure 4-5.

Figure 4-4 Fluidic status of DIFF channel sample preparation

Figure 4-5 Fluidic status of DIFF channel measurement

4-11
Fluidic System

Cleaning of DIFF channel (40.5-59s)

During this period:


1. The sample surrounded by the sheath passes through the flow cell. Then, the flow cell and
the sample probe are washed.
2. Cleaning the sample preparation tubing: valve V22 are energized and valve V23 and V24
keep energized. The sheath syringe dispenses diluent to clean the sample preparation
tubing. Meanwhile, valve 38 is energized and waste pump 2 operates to drain the DIFF
bath.
3. Cleaning the DIFF bath
a. Dispensing 1.7ml diluent for cleaning: the sheath syringe dispenses 1.7ml diluent into
the DIFF bath through V21 and V22 to clean the bath.
b. Draining: valve 38 is energized and waste pump 2 operates to drain the DIFF bath.
Meanwhile, the sheath syringe aspirates 2ml diluent.
c. Dispensing 2ml diluent for soaking: valve V22, V23 and V24 are energized. The
sheath syringe dispenses 2ml diluent to soak the DIFF bath.

4.3.3 WBC/HGB Channel


HGB background, cleaning, draining volumetric tube and sample
distribution (0-18.2s)

1. 0.1s HGB background test.


2. Creating vacuum: the vacuum used for draining the volumetric tube and cleaning the back
bath is provided by the vacuum chamber. Thus, the waste pump is needed to create the
vacuum in the vacuum chamber.
3. Zapping and cleaning the back bath.
4. Draining the WBC bath: valve V36 is energized and waste pump 3 operates to drain the
WBC bath.
5. Draining the WBC volumetric tube: valve V25 and V31 are energized to drain the
volumetric tube for three times.

4-12
Fluidic System

Figure 4-6 Fluidic status when draining WBC volumetric tube

6. WBC sample distribution:


a. At 8.9s, valve V02, V03 and V27are energized and the waste pump operates. The
sample probe ascends while the diluent syringe dispenses the diluent to clean the
exterior of the sample probe.
b. Dispensing initial volume and sample probe moving to the WBC bath: valve V03 is
energized. The 10ml diluent syringe dispenses a small portion of the diluent into the
WBC bath as the initial volume. The sample probe moves to the WBC bath, and then
descends into the WBC bath.
c. Dispensing the blood sample: the aspiration syringe dispenses 6 l sample into the
WBC bath while mixing the sample by bubbling.

Dispensing lyse and mixing (18.3-25s)

1. The sample probe ascending: the sample probe ascends from the WBC bath, meanwhile
its exterior is washed.
2. Dispensing HGB lyse and mixing: valve V07 is energized. The 2.5ml lyse syringe
dispenses the LH Lyse into the WBC bath and the samples mixes with the lyse by bubbling.
The system waits for the sample becoming stable.

Creating vacuum (18.1-25s)

Vacuum is the power that drives the fluid movement. Waste pump 2 pumps out the air in the
vacuum chamber to create the vacuum between -270HPa and -250HPa.

Counting and bath cleaning

1. WBC counting: valve V33 is energized to start counting. Driven by the stable vacuum

4-13
Fluidic System

-270 to -250 HPa, the sample in the front bath flows to the back bath in the direction
shown in Figure 4-7. The sample volume measured is determined by the diluent volume
that flows between the two photocouplers of the WBC volumemetric tube..
2. HGB measurement: HGB measurement starts at 42.5s.
3. Cleaning the front bath twice.
4. Cleaning the back bath: valve V29 and V31 are energized. Driven by the vacuum, the
diluent enters the volumetric tube via valve V29, and then passes through valve V31 and
enters the vacuum chamber. Then, valve V31, V33 and V13 are energized. The diluent
flows into the back bath through the volumetric tube to drain the waste in the back bath.
Driven by waste pump 2, the waste in the vacuum chamber is drained through V37.

Figure 4-7 Fluidic status when WBC counting

Fi
gure 4-8 Fluidic status when cleaning the WBC back bath

4-14
Fluidic System

4.3.4 RBC/PLT Channel


Cleaning, volumetric tube draining (0-18.2s)

1. Creating vacuum: the vacuum used for draining the RBC volumetric tube and cleaning the
back bath is all provided by the vacuum chamber. Thus, waste pump P2 is used to create
the vacuum in the vacuum chamber.
2. Zapping and cleaning the back bath: zap the RBC aperture, and then open V30, V34 and
V14 to clean the back bath and drain the bubbles caused by zapping.
3. Draining the RBC bath and volumetric tube: valve V35 is energized and waste pump P3
operates to drain the RBC bath. Then, V26 and V32 are energized together to drain the
volumetric tube for three times.
4. First dilution and aspiration: during 0-8.8s, the sample probe finishes sampling and sample
is dispensed into the DIFF bath. Thus, the first dilution is formed during the 8.8-18.2s
period and then a portion of the diluted sample is aspirated back into the sample probe.

Figure 4-9 Fluidic status when draining RBC volumetric tube

Second diluting and mixing (18.4-25s)

1. Aspirating the first dilution: the aspiration syringe aspirates the sample diluted at the ratio
of 1:417.6 from the WBC bath, and then ascends while its exterior is being cleaned.
2. Sample probe moving to RBC bath and dispensing initial volume and the sample: the
sample probe moves to the RBC bath. Valve V03 and V08 are energized at the same time,
and the diluent syringe dispenses 1.5ml diluent into the RBC bath and then the sample
probe descends into the RBC bath. Valve V01 and V03 are energized and the 10ml diluent
syringe dispenses the first dilution into the RBC bath to form the second dilution at the ratio

4-15
Fluidic System

of 1:40000.
3. Mixing: Valve V11 is energized. Driven by the pressure, the sample is mixed by bubbling
for three times.

Creating vacuum (18.1-25s)

The stable vacuum is created to drive the fluidics when running samples.
Waste pump 2 pumps out the air in the vacuum chamber to create the vacuum between
-270HP and -250HP.

Counting and bath cleaning

The fluidic status of RBC counting is shown in Figure 4-10.


1. RBC counting: valve V34 is energized to start counting. Driven by the stable vacuum
-270 to -250 HP, the sample in the front bath flows to the back bath in the direction
shown in the following figure. The sample volume measured is determined by the diluent
volume that flows between the two photocouplers of the WBC volumetric tube.

Figure 4-10 Fluidic status of RBC counting

4-16
Fluidic System

Figure 4-11 Fluidic status when cleaning the back bath and draining the front bath

2. Draining the front bath and cleaning: Valve V35 is energized and waste pump pumps the
remaining sample out of the RBC bath. The diluent syringe dispenses 3ml diluent into the
RBC bath for soaking.
3. Cleaning the back bath: The vacuum of -400 to -350HP is created in the vacuum chamber.
Valve V30 and V32 are energized. The volumetric tube is cleaned and bubbles are
discharged from the top of the volumetric tube. Vale V32, V14, V34 and V30 are energized
to clean the back bath, and then the waste is discharged.

4.3.5 Sequence of Predilute Mode CBC+DIFF Measurement


In the predilute mode, the sample needs to be first manually diluted at the ratio of 1:10. The
sequence inside the analyzer has no great difference with the whole blood mode.

4.3.6 Sequence of CBC Measurement


In the CBC mode, the DIFF channel is not used and the sample dispensing procedures are
also changed.

Sampling and sample dispensing procedures of CBC Mode

A. Aspirating sample and dispensing sample into the WBC bath


15l sample is aspirated by the aspiration syringe, and then the sample probe ascends
meanwhile its exterior is cleaned and the sample probe dispenses 3l sample into the probe
wipe.
The sample probe moves to above the WBC bath

4-17
Fluidic System

The sample probe descends into the WBC bath and dispenses 6l sample into the WBC
bath.

B. Cleaning the sample remains


The sample probe ascends from the WBC bath, meanwhile its exterior is cleaned.
The sample probe dispenses cleanser into the probe wipe from the top to wash off the
residual sample..
The sample probe descends again into the WBC bath and aspirates the diluted sample.

C. RBC second dilution


The sample probe ascends from the WBC bath meanwhile its exterior is cleaned.
The sample probe moves to above the RBC bath.
The sample probe descends into the RBC bath, and then dispenses 1ml diluted sample into
RBC bath, where the sample is further diluted by the 1.5ml diluent that is alrealy there to form
the second dilution at the ratio of 1:40000.

D. Sample probe returning to home position


The sample probe ascends from the RBC bath meanwhile its exterior is cleaned.
The sample probe returns to the home position.

A B

4-18
Fluidic System

C D

Figure 4-12 Dispensing procedures of sample probe

4-19
5 Hardware System

The hematology analyzer hardware system consists of the boards, power execution parts,
sensors, switches and cables. Their relationship is shown below.

Figure 5-1 hardware system structure


Note:
In the figure, the thin arrows represent the cable connections; the thick arrows (connecting the
data board and the driver board) represent the plugboard connections; the square boxes
represent the boards and the ellipses represent the components.
The boards of the hematology analyzer and their functions are shown in the table below.

5-1
Hardware System

Table 5-1 Boards of the hematology analzyer and their functions


No. Name Functions
1 Data board CPU basic system + FPGA + A/D + Analog
channel
2 Drive board MCU+FPGA+ Valves and pumps driving +
Photocoupler detecting + Temperature and
pressure monitoring
3 Mother board Power distribution and centralized wiring.
Plugboard supported
4 Laser control board Laser creating and controlling
5 FS pre-amplification Collecting and pre-amplifying the low-angle
board scattered light
6 SS pre-amplification Collecting and pre-amplifying the high-angle
board scattered light
7 Volumetric board Creating the volumetric signals of RBC and
WBC channels; the vacuum and pressure
sensors and amplifying the detected signals
8 Indicator board Buzzer and indicator
9 Power board Supply D5V,P12V,P24V,A12V power
Supply AC120V/50Hz zapping power
10 Liquid-level board Liquid-level detection of reagents

5-2
Hardware System

5.1 Mother board

5.1.1 Introduction
The function of the mother board is to realize power distribution and centralized wiring of board
input/output.

5.1.2 Board Composition


The mother board is composed of two slots and several connectors. The two slots are for
connecting the data board and the drive board respectively; while the connectors are for
various input/output signals.

Function

Power interface
Slot for data board
Slot for drive board
Connectors for board signals (auto-sampler board, laser control board, pre-amp board,
volumetric board, liquid level checker, key board and indicator board, etc.)
Connectors for component (valves, pumps, motors, heaters, fan, HGB module,
independent key, optics, etc.) signals
Communication interface (COM port and LAN port)

Block diagram

5-3
Hardware System

DB9(rs23 Socket for suck key


RJ45
2) and right door chec
ker

Socket for Indicator


rs232 int. Isolate and key board
driver transfoemer

Power filter
& indicator Socket for laser
control board

Socket for valume


mesure and press

Data borad power


Socktes for Data control board
Board
Sockets for pre-amp.
board

Sockets Socket for HGB


module
for
Power RS422 int Socket for Auto-
Supply driver sample

Sockets for Drive Sockets for


Drive boatd power vavles,pumps,motors,heat
Board ers

Sockets for
optics sensor

Socket
for Socket for
power( Autosa Socket for
Socket for fan Liq.level
mple board) Temp. sensor
checker

Figure 5-2 Function of mother board

Definition of interface

List of connectors

Table 5-2 List of connectors


SN. PIN Number Function Description
PA1 96 Data board connector, digital signals
PA2 96 Data board connector, analog signals
PB1 96 Drive board connector, digital signals and part of optics
signals

5-4
Hardware System

PB2 96 Drive board connector, part of optics signals and motor drive
signals
PB3 96 Drive board connector, drive signals of motors, valves,
pumps, and heaters
J1 8 RS-232 LAN port
J2 9 Reserved for COM port debugging
J3 10 Multi-functional JTAG port, debugging or upgrading MCU
programs of auto-sampler board
J4 4 RS-422 COM port, COM port of auto-sampler board
J5 8 Indicator board
J6 6 Connector of aspirate key, right door switch, and optical
shielding box switch
J7 6 Laser control board connector
J8 8 Reserved for side fluorescence channel (SF)
J9 8 side scatter channel (SS)
J10 8 Connector for forward scatter channel (FS)
J11 5 HGB module connector
J12 8 A+/- 12V connector
J13 3 AC120V connector
J14 6 Temperature sensor connector
J15 12 Volumetric board connector
J16 34 Connector for level sensors and associated photocouplers
J17 No in use
J18 24 Connector for photocouplers 1-6
J19 24 Connector photocouplers 7-12
J20 24 Connector photocouplers 13-18
J21 3 Reserved for DC mix motor
J22 8 Connector stepping motors 1-2
J23 8 Connector stepping motors 3-4
J24 8 Connector stepping motors 5-6
J25 8 Connector stepping motors 7-8
J26 No in use
J27 4 Connector for heater 2
J28 4 Connector for heater 1
J29 20 Connector for pumps 1-7
J30 20 Connector for valves 1-10
J31 20 Connector for valves 11-20
J32 20 Connector for valves 21-30
J33 20 Connector for valves 31-40

5-5
Hardware System

J34 2 Fan connector


J35 10 Connector for P12V and P24V
J36 6 Connector for auto-sampler board power
J37 4 D+5V connector

Data board slots (PA1 and PA2)


Data board slots are two 96pin DIN 41612 connectors.
Connector type: AMP VME female connector 3*32PIN vertical connection
Model: 5535043-4

Table 5-3 Definition of PA1 for mother board


Column A Column B Column C
1 D+5V D+5V D+5V
2 D+5V D+5V D+5V
3 D+5V D+5V D+5V
4 D+5V D+5V D+5V
5 D+5V D+5V D+5V
6 DGND DGND DGND
7 DGND DGND DGND
8 DGND DGND DGND
9 DGND DGND DGND
10 DGND DGND DGND
11 DGND DGND DGND
12 TP_TX+ PWFBOUT TP_RX+
13 TP_TX- DGND TP_RX-
14 DGND DGND DGND
15 DGND DGND DGND
16 TMS_TO_DRV TMS_TO_AS UART3_TO_PC
17 TCK_TO_DRV TCK_TO_AS UART3_TO_DAT
18 DATA_TO_DRV DATA_TO_AS DGND
19 DATA_FROM_DR DATA_FROM_AS DGND
V
20 DGND UART1_TO_DAT+ UART1_TO_AS+
21 DGND UART1_TO_DAT- UART1_TO_AS-
22 UART0_TO_DRV DGND DGND
23 UART0_TO_DAT DGND DGND
24 DGND DGND #SUCK_KEY
25 DGND #VM_ON DGND
26 DGND #RBC_START #BUZ

5-6
Hardware System

27 DGND #RBC_STOP #COUNT_KEY


28 DGND #WBC_START FAULT
29 DGND #WBC_STOP READY
30 DGND DGND OPTI_DOOR
31 DGND #LASER_ON #RIGHT_DOOR
32 DGND DGND #INSERT_DOOR

Table 5-4 Definition of PA2 for mother board


Column A Column B Column C
1 AGND AGND AGND
2 AGND LASER_CURT AGND
3 AGND AGND AGND
4 AGND AGND AGND
5 AGND AGND AGND
6 AGND AGND AGND
7 AGND AGND AGND
8 AGND AGND AGND
9 AGND AGND AGND
10 AGND AGND AGND
11 AGND NC AGND
12 AGND AGND A GND
13 AGND SS AGND
14 AGND AGND AGND
15 AGND FS AGND
16 AGND AGND AGND
17 AGND HGB_IN AGND
18 AGND AGND AGND
19 AGND HGB+ AGND
20 AGND HGB- AGND
21 AGND A-12V A-12V
22 AGND A-12V A-12V
23 AGND A+12V A+12V
24 AGND A+12V A+12V
25 AGND A+12V A+12V
26 NC NC NC
27 NC A+70V NC
28 NC NC NC
29 NC NC NC

5-7
Hardware System

30 NC AC120_B NC
31 NC NC NC
32 AC120_A NC NC

Connector J1 for LAN port


Connector type: RJ-45 female connector with iron casing
Model: 5406217-1

Table 5-5 Definition of J1 for mother board


Definition Description
1 ET_TP+ Transmit, positive
2 ET_TP- Transmit, negative
3 ET_RP+ Receive, positive
4 ET-NGP Receive, vitual ground
5 ET-NGP Receive, vitual ground
6 ET_RP- Receive, negative
7 ET-NGR Receive, vitual ground
8 ET-NGR Receive, vitual ground

Connector J2 for COM port


Connector type: DB9 male / female connector

Table 5-6 Definition of J2 for mother board (male connector)


Pin Definition Description
1 NC
2 RXD/TXD Send/receive
3 TXD/RXD Receive/send
4 NC
5 GND
6-9 NC

Table 5-7 Definition of J2 for mother board (female connector)


Pin Definition Description
1 GND
2 NC
3 TXD/RXD Send/receive
4 RXD/TXD Receive/send
5-9 NC

Connector J3 for JTAG

5-8
Hardware System

Connector type: HEADER WTB 2.54MM DIP2*5 TOP 70246SERIES


Model: 70246-1001, MOLEX

Table 5-8 Definition of J3 for mother board


Pin Definition Description
1 D3V3
2 GND
3 GND
4 TCK JTAG clock
5 TMS JTAG status select
6 DATA_FROM_AS JTAG data to data board
7 DATA_TO_AS JTAG data to drive board
8 NC
9 GND
10 NC

Connector J6 for aspirate key and door switch on/off checking


Connector type: HEADER WTB 2MM DIP1*6SIDE PHSERIES
Model: B6B-PH-K 2MM 'JST'

Table 5-9 Definition of J6 for mother board


Pin Definition Description
1 #SUCK_KEY Aspirate key on/off, effective low
2 GND
3 #RIGHT_DOOR Right door switch on/off
4 GND
5 OPTI_DOOR optical shielding box switch
6 GND

Connector J4 for auto-sampler board signal


Connector type: HEADER WTB 2MM DIP1*4SIDE PHSERIES
Model: B4B-PH-K 'JST'

Table 5-10 Definition of J4 for mother board


Pin Definition Description
1 UART2_TO_AS+ 5474 serial port 2 to positive end of
sample board data
2 UART2_TO_AS- 5474 serial port 2 to negative end of
sample board data
3 UART2_TO_DAT+ sample board serial port to positive
end of 5474 serial port data

5-9
Hardware System

4 UART2_TO_DAT- sample board serial port to negative


end of 5474 serial port data

Connector J5 for indicator board


Connector type: HEADER WTB 2MM DIP1*8 TOP PHSERIES
Model: B8B-PH-K 'JST' 2MM

Table 5-11 Definition of J5 for mother board


Pin Definition Description
1 D+5V
2 #COUNT_KEY NC
3 #INSERT_DOOR NC
4 FAULT Fault status indicator light, effective high
5 READY Ready status indicator light, effective
high
6 NC
7 #BUZ Buzzer driven
8 GND

Connector J7 for laser board


Connector type: HEADER WTB 2.5MM DIP1*6SIDE XHSERIES
Model: B-6B-XH-A 'JST'

Table 5-12 Definition of J7 for mother board


Pin Definition Description
1 NC
2 AGND
3 LASER_CURT Laser current feedback, analog signal
4 A+12V
5 #LASER_ON Laser source on/off signal, effective low
6 D+5V

Connector J9 and J10 for pre-amplification board


Connector type: HEADER WTB 2.5MM DIP1*8SIDE XHSERIES
Model: B8B-XH-K 'JST'

Table 5-13 Definition of J9, J10 for mother board


Pin Definition Description
1 AGND
2 FS/SS FS/SS signal input, analog signal

5-10
Hardware System

3 AGND
4 AGND
5 A-12V
6 AGND Connecting inner shield of cable
7 A+12V
8 MHOLE Connecting external shield of cable

Connector J11 for HGB module


Connector type: HEADER WTB 2MM DIP1*5SIDE PHSERIES
Model: B5B-PH-K 'JST'

Table 5-14 Definition of J11 for mother board


Pin Definition Description
1 HGB+ HGB light drive,
positive
2 HGB- HGB light drive,
negative
3 HGB_IN HGB feedback
4 AGND
5 AGND

Connector J12 for analog A12V


Connector type: HEADER WTB 4.2MM DIP2*4 SIDE, 5566 serial
Model: 1-794509-1 'JST'

Table 5-15 Definition of J12 for mother board


Pin Definition Description
1 AGND
2 NC
3 NC
4 NC
5 A+12V
6 AGND
7 AGND
8 A-12V

Connector J13 for AC120V


Connector type: HEADER WTB 2.5MM DIP1*3 TOP XHSERIES
Model: B-3B-XH-A 'JST' 2.5MM

5-11
Hardware System

Table 5-16 Definition of J13 for mother board


Pin Definition Description
1 AC120V_A A end of 120V AC
2 NC
3 AC120V_B B end of 120V AC

Drive board slots: PB1, PB2 and PB3


DIN41612, 96PIN female
Definition of PB1-PB3 signals:
Note: On the mother board, PB1 is placed laterally, with column A under it, and row 1 at left
side. Since the drive board and mother board is connected vertically, column A should be
arranged at the nearest joint side of board.

Table 5-17 Definition of PB1 for mother board


column A column B column C
1 HT1_SA HT1_SB AMBI_SA
2 HT2_SA HT2_SB AMBI_SB
3 POSI_PRESS NEGA_PRESS DGND
4 DGND DGND DGND
5 DGND DGND DGND
6 DGND DGND DGND
7 DGND DGND DGND
8 DGND DGND DGND
9 DGND DGND DGND
10 DGND DGND DGND
11 DGND DGND DGND
12 D+5V D+5V D+5V
13 D+5V D+5V D+5V
14 D+5V D+5V D+5V
15 D+5V D+5V D+5V
16 D+5V D+5V D+5V
17 DGND DGND DGND
18 #LIQ1 #LIQ2 TMS_TO_DRV
19 #LIQ3 #LIQ4 TCK_TO_DRV
20 #LIQ5 #LIQ6 DATA_TO_DRV
21 #LYSE_SENSOR #WASTE_SENSOR DATA_FROM_DRV
22 #LS_ON DGND DGND
23 DGND DGND DGND
24 OP17_CTRL OP17_STS UART0_TO_DRV

5-12
Hardware System

25 OP18_CTRL OP18_STS UART0_TO_DAT


26 OP19_CTRL OP19_STS DGND
27 OP20_CTRL OP20_STS DGND
28 OP1_CTRL OP1_STS OP2_CTRL
29 OP2_STS OP3_CTRL OP3_STS
30 OP4_CTRL OP4_STS OP5_CTRL
31 OP5_STS OP6_CTRL OP6_STS
32 OP7_CTRL OP7_STS OP8_CTRL

Table 5-18 Definition of PB2 for mother board


column A column B column C
1 OP8_STS OP9_CTRL OP9_STS
2 OP10_CTRL OP10_STS OP11_CTRL
3 OP11_STS OP12_CTRL OP12_STS
4 OP13_CTRL OP13_STS OP14_CTRL
5 OP14_STS OP15_CTRL OP15_STS
6 OP16_CTRL OP16_STS DM_ON
7 DGND DGND DGND
8 NC NC NC
9 P+24V SM1_AP SM1_AP
10 P+24V SM1_AN SM1_AN
11 P+24V SM1_BP SM1_BP
12 P+24V SM1_BN SM1_BN
13 P+24V SM2_AP SM2_AP
14 P+24V SM2_AN SM2_AN
15 P+24V SM2_BP SM2_BP
16 P+24V SM2_BN SM2_BN
17 P+24V SM3_AP SM3_AP
18 P+24V SM3_AN SM3_AN
19 P+24V SM3_BP SM3_BP
20 P+24V SM3_BN SM3_BN
21 P+24V SM4_AP SM4_AP
22 P+24V SM4_AN SM4_AN
23 P+24V SM4_BP SM4_BP
24 P+24V SM4_BN SM4_BN
25 PGND SM5_AP SM5_AP
26 PGND SM5_AN SM5_AN
27 PGND SM5_BP SM5_BP

5-13
Hardware System

28 PGND SM5_BN SM5_BN


29 PGND SM6_AP SM6_AP
30 PGND SM6_AN SM6_AN
31 PGND SM6_BP SM6_BP
32 PGND SM6_BN SM6_BN

Table 5-19 Definition of PB3 for mother board


column A column B column C
1 PGND SM7_AP SM7_AP
2 PGND SM7_AN SM7_AN
3 PGND SM7_BP SM7_BP
4 PGND SM7_BN SM7_BN
5 PGND SM8_AP SM8_AP
6 PGND SM8_AN SM8_AN
7 PGND SM8_BP SM8_BP
8 PGND SM8_BN SM8_BN
9 PGND HT1_ON HT1_ON
10 PGND HT2_ON HT2_ON
11 PGND PGND PGND
12 PGND PUMP7 PUMP7
13 PGND PUMP6 PUMP6
14 P+12V PUMP5 PUMP5
15 P+12V PUMP4 PUMP4
16 P+12V PUMP3 PUMP3
17 P+12V PUMP2 PUMP2
18 P+12V PUMP1 PUMP1
19 V1 V2 V3
20 V4 V5 V6
21 V7 V8 V9
22 V10 V11 V12
23 V13 V14 V15
24 V16 V17 V18
25 V19 V20 V21
26 V22 V23 V24
27 V25 V26 V27
28 V28 V29 V30
29 V31 V32 V33
30 V34 V35 V36

5-14
Hardware System

31 V37 V38 V39


32 V40 NC NC

Connector J14 for temperature sensor


Connector type: HEADER WTB 2.5MM DIP1*6 TOP XHSERIES
Model: B-6B-XH-A 'JST'

Table 5-20 Definition of J14 for mother board


Pin Definition Description
1 HT1_SA both ends of thermistor of heater
2 HT1_SB 1
3 HT2_SA both ends of thermistor of heater
4 HT2_SB 2
5 AMBI_SA both ends of thermistor of
6 AMBI_SB environment temperature

Connector J15 for sensors of volumetric board and pressure control board
Connector type: HEADER WTB 2MM DIP1*12 TOP PHSERIES
Model: SIP12TD-B12B-PH-K 'JST'

Table 5-21 Definition of J15 for mother board


Pin Definition Description
1 P+12V
2 PGND
3 DGND
4 POSI_PRESS Pressure chamber (pressure) signal
5 NEGA_PRESS Vacuum chamber (vacuum) signal
6 DGND
7 #VM_ON Volumetric optics is on, effective low
8 #RBC_START RBC volume measurement starts,
effective low
9 #RBC_STOP RBC volume measurement stops,
effective low
10 #WBC_START WBC volume measurement starts,
effective low
11 #WBC_STOP WBC volume measurement stops,
effective low
12 D+5V

Connector J16 for liquid level sensor

5-15
Hardware System

Connector type: HEADER WTB 2MM DIP2*17 TOP


Model: B34B-PHDSS-B(LF)(SN) 'JST'

Table 5-22 Definition of J16 for mother board


Pin Definition Description
1 D+5V
2 #LIQ1 LIQ1status, effective low
3 #LIQ2 LIQ 2 status, effective low
4 #LIQ3 LIQ 3 status, effective low
5 #LIQ4 LIQ 4 status, effective low
6 #LIQ5 LIQ 5 status, effective low
7 #LS_ON Control signal for liquid level board
8 GND
9 NC
10 NC
11 #LIQ6 LIQ 6 status, effective low
12 GND
13 #LYSE_SENSOR LYSE level sensor, status, i, effective
low
14 GND
15 #WASTE_SENSOR Waste level sensor status, effective
low
16 GND
17 NC
18 NC
19 OP17_CTRL Optics 17 control
20 OP17_STS Optics 17 status
21 GND
22 GND
23 OP18_CTRL Optics 18 control
24 OP18_STS Optics 18 status
25 GND
26 GND
27 OP19_CTRL Optics 19 control
28 OP19_STS Optics 19 status
29 GND
30 GND
31 OP20_CTRL Optics 20 control
32 OP20_STS Optics 20 status

5-16
Hardware System

33 GND
34 GND

Connector J18, J19, J20 for optics of position sensor


Position sensor has three connectors, all using double-row and 2mm connectors.
Connector type: HEADER WTB 2.0MM DIP2*12 TOP
Model: B24B-PHDSS-B (LF) (SN) 'JST'

Table 5-23 Definition of J18 for mother board


Pin Definition Description
1 OP1_CTRL Optics 1 drive
2 OP1_STS Optics 1 status
3,4 DGND
5 OP2_CTRL Optics 2 drive
6 OP2_STS Optics 2 status
7,8 DGND
9 OP3_CTRL Optics 3 drive
10 OP3_STS Optics 3 status
11,12 DGND
13 OP4_CTRL Optics 4 control
14 OP4_STS Optics 4 status
15,16 DGND
17 OP5_CTRL Optics 5 drive
18 OP5_STS Optics 5 status
19,20 DGND
21 OP6_CTRL Optics 6 drive
22 OP6_STS Optics 6 status
23,24 DGND

Table 5-24 Definition of J19 for mother board


Pin Definition Description
1 OP7_CTRL Optics 7 drive
2 OP7_STS Optics 7 status
3,4 DGND
5 OP8_CTRL Optics 8 drive
6 OP8_STS Optics 8 status
7,8 DGND
9 OP9_CTRL Optics 9 drive
10 OP9_STS Optics 9 status

5-17
Hardware System

11,12 DGND
13 OP10_CTRL Optics 10 drive
14 OP10_STS Optics 10 status
15,16 DGND
17 OP11_CTRL Optics 11 drive
18 OP11_STS Optics 11 status
19,20 DGND
21 OP12_CTRL Optics 12 drive
22 OP12_STS Optics 12 status
23,24 DGND

Table 5-25 Definition of J20 for mother board


Pin Definition Description
1 OP13_CTRL Optics 13 drive
2 OP13_STS Optics 13 status
3,4 DGND
5 OP14_CTRL Optics 14 drive
6 OP14_STS Optics 14 status
7,8 DGND
9 OP15_CTRL Optics 15 drive
10 OP15_STS Optics 15 status
11,12 DGND
13 OP16_CTRL Optics 16
14 OP16_STS Optics 16 status
15,16 DGND
17-24 NC

Connector J21 (reserved) for DC mix motor


Connector type: HEADER WTB 2MM DIP1*3 TOP PHSERIES
Model: B3B-PH-K 'JST'

Table 5-26 Definition of J21 for mother board


Pin Definition Description
1 DM_ON DC Motor drive
2 NC
3 DGND

Connector J22, J23, J24, J25 for stepping motors


Each connector connects two motors.
Connector type: HEADER WTB 2.54MM DIP1*8 TOP XHSERIES

5-18
Hardware System

Model: B-8B-XH-A 'JST' 2.54MM

Table 5-27 Definition of J22 for mother board


Pin Definition Description
1 SM1_AP A-phase coil drive , motor 1
2 SM1_AN A-phase coil drive , motor 1
3 SM1-BP B-phase coil drive , motor 1
4 SM1_BN B-phase coil drive , motor 1
5 SM2_AP A-phase coil drive , motor 2
6 SM2_AN A-phase coil drive , motor 2
7 SM2-BP B-phase coil drive , motor 2
8 SM2_BN B-phase coil drive , motor 2

Table 5-28 Definition of J23 for mother board


Pin Definition Description
1 SM3_AP A-phase coil drive , motor 3
2 SM3_AN A-phase coil drive , motor 3
3 SM3-BP B-phase coil drive , motor 3
4 SM3_BN B-phase coil drive , motor 3
5 SM4_AP A-phase coil drive , motor 4
6 SM4_AN A-phase coil drive , motor 4
7 SM4-BP B-phase coil drive , motor 4
8 SM4_BN B-phase coil drive , motor 4

Table 5-29 Definition of J24 for mother board


Pin Definition Description
1 SM5_AP A-phase coil drive , motor 5
2 SM5_AN A-phase coil drive , motor 5
3 SM5-BP B-phase coil drive , motor 5
4 SM5-BN B-phase coil drive , motor 5
5 SM6_AP A-phase coil drive , motor 6
6 SM6_AN A-phase coil drive , motor 6
7 SM6-BP B-phase coil drive , motor 6
8 SM6_BN B-phase coil drive , motor 6

Table 5-30 Definition of J25 for mother board


Pin Definition Description
1 SM7_AP A-phase coil drive , motor 7

5-19
Hardware System

2 SM7_AN A-phase coil drive , motor 7


3 SM7-BP B-phase coil drive , motor 7
4 SM7_BN B-phase coil drive , motor 7
5 SM8_AP A-phase coil drive , motor 8
6 SM8_AN A-phase coil drive , motor 8
7 SM8-BP B-phase coil drive , motor 8
8 SM8_BN B-phase coil drive , motor 8

Connector J27, J28 for heaters


Connector type: HEADER WTB 2.5MM DIP1*4 TOP XHSERIES
Model: B-4B-XH-A 'JST'

Table 5-31 Definition of J27 for mother board


Pin Definition Description
1 P+24V
2 HT1_ON Heater 1 drive
3,4 Heater 1 control

Table 5-32 Definition of J28 for mother board


Pin Definition Description
1 P+24V
2 HT2_ON Heater 2 drive
3,4 Heater 2 control

Connector J29, J30, J31, J32, J33 for pumps and valves
Valves and pumps have five double-row PH-model connectors.
Connector type: HEADER WTB 2MM DIP2*10 TOP PHDSERIES
Model: B20B-PHDSS-B(LF)(SN)

Table 5-33 Definition of J29 for mother board


Pin Definition Description
1~6 NC
7 PUMP7 Pump 7 drive
8 P+12V
9 PUMP6 Pump 6 drive
10 P+12V
11 PUMP5 Pump 5 drive
12 P+12V
13 PUMP4 Pump 4 drive

5-20
Hardware System

14 P+12V
15 PUMP3 Pump 3 drive
16 P+12V
17 PUMP2 Pump 2 drive
18 P+12V
19 PUMP1 Pump 1 drive
20 P+12V

Table 5-34 Definition of J30 for mother board


Pin Definition Description
1 V1 Valve 1 drive
2 P+12V
3 V2 Valve 2 drive
4 P+12V
5 V3 Valve 3 drive
6 P+12V
7 V4 Valve 4 drive
8 P+12V
9 V5 Valve 5 drive
10 P+12V
11 V6 Valve 6 drive
12 P+12V
13 V7 Valve 7 drive
14 P+12V
15 V8 Valve 8 drive
16 P+12V
17 V9 Valve 9 drive
18 P+12V
19 V10 Valve 10 drive
20 P+12V

Table 5-35 Definition of J31 for mother board


Pin Definition Description
1 V11 Valve 11 drive
2 P+12V
3 V12 Valve 12 drive
4 P+12V
5 V13 Valve 13 drive

5-21
Hardware System

6 P+12V
7 V14 Valve 14 drive
8 P+12V
9 V15 Valve 15 drive
10 P+12V
11 V16 Valve 16 drive
12 P+12V
13 V17 Valve 17 drive
14 P+12V
15 V18 Valve 18 drive
16 P+12V
17 V19 Valve 19 drive
18 P+12V
19 V20 Valve 20 drive
20 P+12V

Table 5-36 Definition of J32 for mother board


Pin Definition Description
1 V21 Valve 21 drive
2 P+12V
3 V22 Valve 22 drive
4 P+12V
5 V23 Valve 23 drive
6 P+12V
7 V24 Valve 24 drive
8 P+12V
9 V25 Valve 25 drive
10 P+12V
11 V26 Valve 26 drive
12 P+12V
13 V27 Valve 27 drive
14 P+12V
15 V28 Valve 28 drive
16 P+12V
17 V29 Valve 29 drive
18 P+12V
19 V30 Valve 30 drive
20 P+12V

5-22
Hardware System

Table 5-37 Definition of J33 for mother board


Pin Definition Description
1 V31 Valve 31 drive
2 P+12V
3 V32 Valve 32 drive
4 P+12V
5 V33 Valve 33 drive
6 P+12V
7 V34 Valve 34 drive
8 P+12V
9 V35 Valve 35 drive
10 P+12V
11 V36 Valve 36 drive
12 P+12V
13 V37 Valve 37 drive
14 P+12V
15 V38 Valve 38 drive
16 P+12V
17 V39 Valve 39 drive
18 P+12V
19 V40 Valve 40 drive
20 P+12V

Connector J37 for D+5V


Connector type: HEADER WTB 4.2MM DIP2*2 TOP 5566SERIES
Model: 3928-1043

Table 5-38 Definition of J37 for mother board


Pin Definition
1 D+5V
2 D+5V
3 DGND
4 DGND

Connector J35 for P+12V, P+24V


Connector type: HEADER WTB 4.2MM DIP2X5 TOP 5566SERIES
Model: 39-31-0108

5-23
Hardware System

Table 5-39 Definition of J35 for mother board


Pin Definition
1 P+24V
2 P+24V
3 P+24V
4 P+12V
5 P+12V
6 PGND
7 PGND
8 PGND
9 PGND
10 PGND

Connector J34 for fan power


Connector type: HEADER WTB 2.5MM DIP1*2 TOP XHSERIES
Model: B-2B-XH-A 'JST'

Table 5-40 Definition of J34 for mother board


Pin Definition
1 P+12V
2 PGND

Connector J36 for power (auto-sampler board)


Connector type: HEADER WTB 4.2MM DIP2*3 TOP 5566SERIES
Model: 3928-1063

Table 5-41 Definition of J36 for mother board


Pin Definition
1 D+5V
2 P+12V
3 P+24V
4 DGND
5 PGND
6 PGND

5-24
Hardware System

Assembly drawing

Figure 5-3 Assembly drawing of the mother board

5-25
Hardware System

5.1.3 Adjustment and Test Points

There are no test points designed specially for mother board. To test certain power or signal,
use the touch points of connectors directly.
On the mother board with the Debug Serial Communication Port (DSCP) configured, the
configuration of COM port is implemented by several connection matrices. See the following
introduction for connection method.
By adjusting JP1 to JP3, the J2 COM port can support the following 5 debugging modes (all via
PC COM port).
1. Data board COM 3: debugging the data board function
2. Data board COM 0: debugging the data boards function of controlling the drive board
3. Drive board COM: debugging the drive board function
4. Data board COM 1: debugging the data boards function of controlling the atuo-sampler
board
5. Auto-sampler board COM: debugging the function of auto-sampler board
Notice: In case of functions 2 or 3 (4 and 5 are the same), do not connect the drive board and
the data board at the same time. Namely, in case of function 2, do not connect the drive board,
and in case of function 3, do not connect the data board.
JP1 and JP2 respectively connect UART1, 3, 0 to the input of the RS-232 transceiver. JP1 can
also be used for selecting the UART1 COM direction. JP2 connects interface signals of the
data board or the auto-sampler board to the RS-422 transceiver. (U2 in Figure 6)
See Table 5-42 for configuration details.

Table 5-42 Configuration details


Debugging COM port JP1 JP2
Data board UART0 Put jumpers on pins 1-2 and No jumpers
3-4,
Drive board COM Put jumpers on pins 5-6 No jumpers
and 7-8
Data board UART1 Put jumpers on pins 9-10 Put jumpers on pins
and 11-12. 1-2,,3-4,,5-6, and,7-8..
Auto-sampler board Put jumpers on pins 9-10 Put jumpers on pins
COM and 11-12. 9-10,11-12,13-14,and 15-16.
Data board UART3 Put jumpers on pins 13-14 No jumpers.
and 15-16.

A male or female receptacle can be installed at J2. Four cable types can be supported, as
shown in the following table.

5-26
Hardware System

Table 5-43 COM port receptacle and cable selection


Connector cable JP3
Serial cable with female 3-4, 7-8, 13-14, 15-16
DB9 male connectors on both ends,
receptacle signals not intercrossed
(straight or 90 Serial cable with female 3-4, 7-8, 9-10, 11-12
installation) connectors on both ends,
signals intercrossed; namely
the COM cable
Serial cable with a female 1-2, 5-6, 13-14, 15-16
DB9 female connector on one end and a
receptacle male connector on the other
(straight or 90 end, signals not intercross;
installation) namely the COM extension
cable
Serial cable with a female 1-2, 5-6, 9-10, 11-12
connector on one end and a
male connector on the other
end, signals intercross

JP4 needs to be configured as shown in the following table when the MCU JTAG of the drive
board or the auto-sampler board is to be connected to J3.

Table 5-44 Connection matrix of multi-functional JTAG port


JTAG function JP4
Connect MCU JTAG of No jumpers
auto-sampler board
Connect MCU JTAG of Put jumpers on pins 1-2, 3-4, 5-6 and
drive board 7-8.

5.1.4 Removal

Purpose

The mother board is unlikely to be damaged. But in case you need to replace it, following the
steps below to do so.

Tools

107 cross-headed screwdriver


107 flat-headed screwdriver

5-27
Hardware System

Removal

Follow these two procedures to disassemble the mother board:


To remove the mother board from the analyzer:
1. Power off the analyzer.
2. Unplug the power cable and the LAN cable from the back of the analyzer.
3. Remove the top cover and front cover of the analyzer
4. Remove the data board and the drive board.
5. Disconnect all cables from the mother board.
6. Use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove the four M4X8 small panhead screws
fixing the bracket.
7. Pull the bracket to remove it.

Figure 5-4 Disassembly diagram of the mother board-1


1 Bracket 2 Mother board
3 M4X8 panhead screw

To disassemble the mother board:


1. Use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove the fourteen M3X6 cross-headed
panhead screws on the mother board.
2. Pull the mother board towards the panel by a certain distance, remove the LAN port
connector from the metal plate and take out the mother board.

5-28
Hardware System

Figure 5-5 Disassembly diagram of the mother board-2


1 Bracket 2 Mother board
3M3X6 cross-headed panhead
screws

Installation

Install the mother board as per the above-mentioned procedures in the reverse order.
Note: Since the mother board has many connectors, pay attention to the number indicated on
the connector to avoid wrong connection. The design of the mother board has included certain
error-proof measures. Generally speaking, wrong connection will not lead to safety issues, yet
the whole unit cannot function properly

Verification

1. Power on the analyzer, the fan at the back of the analyzer should run normally. Use a
multimeter to measure the voltage of D+5V, P+12V, P+24V, A+/-12V, AC120V, and all
measurements should be within normal ranges.
2. Power indicators of the boards are on, showing that the mother board is functioning
correctly.

5.1.5 Troubleshooting
Since the function of the mother board is to realize power distribution and centralized wiring, a
failure in the mother board usually takes the form of hardware system failure.

5-29
Hardware System

Table 5-45 Troubleshooting


Failure Cause Recommended Action
Abnormal voltage cable not properly Check connectors J12, J13, J35,
detected connected to power J37;
connector If the connection is normal, use a
multimeter to check if the voltage
of each power source indicated
on the mother board is correct.
Fan not running. Fan damaged or no power Check connector J34;
supply Check the P12V indicator on the
drive board
Communication failure Connector J4 abnormal.. Check connector J4
of auto-sampler board Connector J36 abnormal.. Check connector J36

Pressure control Connector J15 abnormal Check connector J15


abnormal
Volumetric abnormal Connector J15 abnormal Check connector J15
Liquid level inspection Connector J16 abnormal Check connector J16
abnormal, misinform
Laser not light or laser Connector J17 abnormal Check connector J7
current detected
abnormal
Pre-amp board has no Connectors J9 and J10 Check connectors J9 and J10
power or work abnormal
abnormally.
Motor not active Motor drive cable not Check connectors J22,J23,J24,
properly connected . and 25
Valve not active Valve drive cable not Check connectors J30,J31,J32
properly connected. and J33
Pump not active Pump drive cable not Check connector J29
properly connected
Temperature control Temperature sensor not Check connector J14
fails. properly connected.

5-30
Hardware System

5.2 Data board

5.2.1 Introduction
The data function of the data board consists of two aspects: analog part and digital part. The
analog part is responsible for obtaining, amplifying, and conditioning sensor signals and
converting the analog signals into digital signals. The digital part processes digital signals and
uploads them to the PC as well as provides the platform for the built-in software and the
access interface.

5.2.2 Board composition

Function

The analog part:


Conditioning and converting power
Monitoring voltage (including power voltage, WBC aperture voltage, RBC aperture voltage
and FS background voltage, also monitoring laser drive current and AD working status,
etc.)
Collecting and conditioning WBC/RBC volume signals
Detecting and amplifying HGB signals
Conditioning WBC DIFF signals
Driving constant-current supply
Controlling and setting amplification factors for all channels
Zapping apertures
AD conversion

The digital part:


Providing a platform for software operating
Controlling interfaces for the indicator board and the key board
Providing communication interfaces for the autoloader board and the drive board
Providing communication interfaces for PC
Controlling and monitoring interfaces for the volumetric board and the laser board
Processing digital signals and identifying pulse

Block diagram

5-31
Hardware System

Figure 5-6 Data board circuit

A12VAC120V
Power for analog
circuits Analog power filter module

signal monitoring of laser current driver


Laser driver

Gain control
RBC/PLT
RBC/PLT amplification RBCPLT
sensor
RBC/PLT aperture

Constant current source


Constant current source/zapping /zapping control
control module of RBC/PLT hole
Monitoring
module

Gain control
WBC
WBC sensor WBC amplification
WBC aperture

Constant current source


Constant current source/zapping /burn control
control module of WBC hole
HGB

Gain control Digital


HGB sensor HGB amplification HGB circuits
of data
board
Driver control
HGB led constant current driver

A/D module

Gain control
SS pre-
SS amplification SS
amplification board

FS base currrent
FS pre- FS
FS amplification
amplification board Gain control

SF
SS pre- SF amplification Gain control
amplification board

Figure 5-7 Functions of analog part on data board

5-32
Hardware System

Figure 5-8 Functions of digital part on data board

Description

The analog part:


Conditioning and converting voltages
The A12V and AC120V analog power sent from the mother board are conditioned or
converted to be the required voltages for the board. The AC120V is used for zapping
apertures.
Monitoring voltage
The voltage of A12V power and VCONST, WBC aperture voltage, RBC aperture voltage, FS
blank voltage, laser drive current and AD working status are all monitored via AD.
Collecting and amplifying WBC/RBC volume signals
WBC/RBC volume signals are collected and conditioned, and then sent to the AD converter.
Detecting and amplifying HGB signals
The HGB current signals are converted into voltage signals through colorimetric method, then
after conditioning, they are sent to the AD converter.
Conditioning WBC DIFF signals
The WBC DIFF signals including FS, SS and SF signal; SF signal reserved are first
collected and conditioned, and then sent to the AD converter.
Driving constant-current supply
The data board provides the constant current for the electrodes of the WBC bath and the
RBC/PLT bath and the HGB light.
Controlling setting amplification factors for all channels

5-33
Hardware System

The zapping voltage on-off, constant current supply/zapping switch and HGB light on-off are
controlled by the GPIO interface of CPU. The amplification factors of WBC DIFF, WBC,
RBC/PLT and HGB signal channels are set by the FPGA as required.
Zapping aperture
If the analyzer has been running for a certain period or the WBC/RBC bath aperture clogs, the
zapping function shall be performed to clean up the aperature by high temperature.
AD conversion
The cell signals (WBC, RBC, PLT and WBC DIFF signals), voltage monitoring signals and
HGB signals are converted into digital signals, and then sent to FPGA for further processing.

The digital part:


Providing a platform for operating system and application software
CPU MCF5474, 266MHz
DDR128M, 133MHz
FLASH16Mx16bit
Communicating with the TTL port of the driver board
Sending control command to the driver board and receiving its response.
Baud rate: 38400bps
Data bit: 8bit
Stop bit: 1bit
Start bit: 1bit
Parity: even
Communicating with the 422 port of the autoloader board
Sending control command to the autoloader board via serial port and receiving its response.
Baud rate: 38400bps
Data bit: 8bit
Stop bit: 1bit
Start bit: 1bit
Parity: even
The IO port for the driver board and autoloader board upgrading
By simulating the JTAG sequence through the CPU IO port, the driver board and the
autoloader board can be upgraded respectively.
Interface for the indicator board
The status indicator and the buzzer on the indicator board are controlled by the CPU IO port.
Interface for the volumetric board
Enabling the volumetric board and receiving its detecting signals
Interface for the laser control board
Enabling the laser control board and detecting laser diode current
Key input interface
Receiving the key events (including the aspiration key and the keypad).

5-34
Hardware System

Status detection interface


Detecting the open/closed status of the side door and laser shielding box
Analog signal input interface
Receiving the analog signals from the pre-amplification board and the aperture electrodes
10M100M network interface
The network interface is introduced by the mother board and connected to PC by the cross
network cable, and capable of program downloading and data transmission, etc.
BDM debug interface
The BDM interface of CPU, which is used for detecting hardware, downloading program and
writing the FLASH, is not available for customers.
JTAG interface of FPGA
It debugs FPGA and downloads FPGA program. It is not available for customers.

Interface definition

The data board is a plug-in board. It provides 9 connectors: the connectors for aperture
electrodes, the connector to connect the digital part to the mother board, the connector to
connect the analog part to the mother board, the connectors for debugging and the reserved
connectors. See Figure 5-9 for the layout of the data board.
See the following table for the function of each connector.

Table 5-46 Interfaces of data board


Number of
Connector Function Note
pins
Connects the RBC/PLT aperture /
J1 3
electrode
J2 Connects the WBC aperture electrode 3 /
Connects the digital part to the mother /
J3 96
board
Connects the analog part to the /
J7 96
mother board
J8 JTAG interface of FPGA 10 /
J9 Reserved 20 /
J10 Reserved 40 /
J11 Reserved 14 /
J13 BDM interface of CPU 26 /

The layout of interfaces is shown in the figure below:

5-35
Hardware System

Figure 5-9 Interfaces layout of data board

Definition of J1
J1 is the signal interface of RBC/PLT.

Table 5-47 Definition of J1


Pin Name Note
1 SHELL Shielding ground
2 RHOLE_A RBC/PLT signals
3 RHOLE_B RBC analog ground

Definition of J2
J2 is the signal interface of WBC.

Table 5-48 Definition of J2


Pin Name Note
1 WHOLE _B WBC analog ground
2 WHOLE_A WBC signals
3 SHELL Shielding ground

Definition of J3
J3 is the signal interface for the digital part of data board and mother board, and is European
96 pin connector.

Table 5-49 Definition of J3

5-36
Hardware System

Pin Definition Function Pin Definition Function


A1 D+5V Power supply B17 JTAG_TCK_ JTAG clock of autoloader board
AS
A2 D+5V Power supply B18 JTAG_TO_A JTAG sending of autoloader
S board
A3 D+5V Power supply B19 JTAG_FROM JTAG receiving of autoloader
_AS board
A4 D+5V Power supply B20 UART1_TO_ Reserved debug serial port
DAT+ sending
A5 D+5V Power supply B21 UART1_TO_ Reserved debug serial port
DAT- sending
A6 DGND Signal ground B22 DGND Signal ground
A7 DGND Signal ground B23 DGND Signal ground
A8 DGND Signal ground B24 DGND Signal ground
A9 DGND Signal ground B25 #VMCTRL Volumetric board enabling
A10 DGND Signal ground B26 #RBC_STAR Start RBC volume metering
T
A11 DGND Signal ground B27 #RBC_STOP Stop RBC volume metering
A12 TP_TX+ Positive sending B28 #WBC_STAR Start WBC volume metering
terminal of T
network
A13 TP_TX- Negative sending B29 #RBC_STOP Stop WBC volume metering
terminal of
network
A14 DGND Signal ground B30 DGND Signal ground
A15 DGND Signal ground B31 #LASER_CT Laser board enabling
RL
A16 JTAG_TM JTAG mode B32 DGND Signal ground
S signal
A17 JTAG_TCK JTAG clock signal C1 D+5V Power supply
A18 JTAG_TO_ JTAG sending of C2 D+5V Power supply
DRV drive board
A19 JTAG_TO_ JTAG receiving of C3 D+5V Power supply
DAT drive board
A20 DGND Signal ground C4 D+5V Power supply
A21 DGND Signal ground C5 D+5V Power supply
A22 UART0_T Serial port C6 DGND Signal ground
O_DRV sending of drive
board

5-37
Hardware System

A23 UART0_T Serial port C7 DGND Signal ground


O_DAT receiving of drive
board
A24 DGND Signal ground C8 DGND Signal ground
A25 DGND Signal ground C9 DGND Signal ground
A26 DGND Signal ground C10 DGND Signal ground
A27 DGND Signal ground C11 DGND Signal ground
A28 DGND Signal ground C12 TP_RX+ Positive receiving terminal of
network
A29 DGND Signal ground C13 TP_RX- Negative receiving terminal of
network
A30 DGND Signal ground C14 DGND Signal ground
A31 DGND Signal ground C15 DGND Signal ground
A32 DGND Signal ground C16 UART3_TO_ PC communication serial port
PC sending
B1 D+5V Power supply C17 UART3_TO_ PC communication serial port
DAT receiving
B2 D+5V Power supply C18 DGND Signal ground
B3 D+5V Power supply C19 DGND Signal ground
B4 D+5V Power supply C20 UART1_TO_ autoloader board serial port
AS+ sending
B5 D+5V Power supply C21 UART1_TO_ autoloader board serial port
AS- receiving
B6 DGND Signal ground C22 DGND Signal ground
B7 DGND Signal ground C23 DGND Signal ground
B8 DGND Signal ground C24 Aspiration key control input
SUCK_KEY
B9 DGND Signal ground C25 DGND Signal ground
B10 DGND Signal ground C26 BUZ Buzzer control output
B11 DGND Signal ground C27 #COUNT_KE Aspirate key control input
Y
B12 PWFBOUT Network power C28 FAULT_J Indicator control output (red)
supply feedback
B13 DGND Signal ground C29 READY_J Indicator control output (green)
B14 DGND Signal ground C30 OPTI_DOOR Laser shielding box monitoring
input
B15 DGND Signal ground C31 #RIGHT_DO Right door status monitoring
OR input
B16 JTAG_TM JTAG mode of C32 #INSERT_KE Compartment door open key

5-38
Hardware System

S_AS autoloader board Y control input

Definition of J7
J7 is the signal interface for the analog part of data board and mother board, and is European
96 pin plug.

Table 5-50 Definition of J7


Pin Name Note Pin Name Note
A1 AGND Analog ground B17 HGB_IN HGB signals input
A2 AGND Analog ground B18 AGND Analog ground
A3 AGND Analog ground B19 HGB+ HGB light drive positive
electrode
A4 AGND Analog ground B20 HGB- HGB light drive negative
electrode
A5 AGND Analog ground B21 A-12V -12V power supply
A6 AGND Analog ground B22 A-12V -12V power supply
A7 AGND Analog ground B23 A+12V +12V power supply
A8 AGND Analog ground B24 A+12V +12V power supply
A9 AGND Analog ground B25 A+12V +12V power supply
A10 AGND Analog ground B26 NC /
A11 AGND Analog ground B27 NC /
A12 AGND Analog ground B28 NC /
A13 AGND Analog ground B29 NC /
A14 AGND Analog ground B30 AC120V_ Zapping voltage input
B
A15 AGND Analog ground B31 NC /
A16 AGND Analog ground B32 NC /
A17 AGND Analog ground C1 AGND Analog ground
A18 AGND Analog ground C2 AGND Analog ground
A19 AGND Analog ground C3 AGND Analog ground
A20 AGND Analog ground C4 AGND Analog ground
A21 AGND Analog ground C5 AGND Analog ground
A22 AGND Analog ground C6 AGND Analog ground
A23 AGND Analog ground C7 AGND Analog ground
A24 AGND Analog ground C8 AGND Analog ground
A25 AGND Analog ground C9 AGND Analog ground
A26 NC / C10 AGND Analog ground
A27 NC / C11 AGND Analog ground
A28 NC / C12 AGND Analog ground

5-39
Hardware System

A29 NC / C13 AGND Analog ground


A30 NC / C14 AGND Analog ground
A31 NC / C15 AGND Analog ground
A32 AC120V_ Zapping voltage input C16 AGND Analog ground
A
B1 AGND Analog ground C17 AGND Analog ground
B2 LASER_I Laser current C18 AGND Analog ground
N monitoring input
B3 AGND Analog ground C19 AGND Analog ground
B4 AGND Analog ground C20 AGND Analog ground
B5 AGND Analog ground C21 A-12V -12V power supply
B6 AGND Analog ground C22 A-12V -12V power supply
B7 AGND Analog ground C23 A+12V +12V power supply
B8 AGND Analog ground C24 A+12V +12V power supply
B9 AGND Analog ground C25 A+12V +12V power supply
B10 AGND Analog ground C26 NC /
B11 FS_IN FS signals input C27 NC /
B12 AGND Analog ground C28 NC /
B13 SS_IN SS signals input C29 NC /
B14 AGND Analog ground C30 NC /
B15 SF_IN SF signals input C31 NC /
B16 AGND Analog ground C32 NC /

Definition of J8
J8 is the JTAG interface of FPGA.

Table 5-51 Definition of J8


Pin Name Note
1 FPGA_TCK Clock
2 GND Signal ground
3 FPGA_TDO Data output
4 VDD Power supply
5 FPGA_TMS Testing mode selection
6 VDD Power supply
7 NC /
8 NC /
9 FPGA_TDI Data input
10 GND Signal ground

Definition of J9

5-40
Hardware System

Reserved. Not available for customers.


Definition of J10
Reserved. Not available for customers..
Definition of J11
Reserved. Not available for customers.
Definition of J13
J11 is the BDM interface of CPU.

Table 5-52 Definition of J13


Pin Definition Function
1 NC /
2 BKPT# Breakpoint setup
3 GND Signal ground
4 DSCLK synchronizing clock input
5 GND Signal ground
6 TCK Clock input of JATG
7 BDM_RSTI BDM reset
8 DSI Serial input
9 VDD Power supply
10 DSO Serial output
11 GND Signal ground
12 PSTDATA7
13 PSTDATA6
14 PSTDATA5
15 PSTDATA4
Configuration data
16 PSTDATA3
17 PSTDATA2
18 PSTDATA1
19 PSTDATA0
20 GND Signal ground
21 NC /
22 NC /
23 GND Signal ground
24 PSTCLK Processor clock
25 NC /
26 MCF_TA# Transmission response

5-41
Hardware System

Assembly drawing

Figure 5-10 Assembly drawing of data board

5-42
Hardware System

5.2.3 Adjustment and Test Points

All the adjustable parameters of analog part are adjusted as per the command of FPGA. Adjust
the parameters' settings in the software interface if necessary.

LED function definition

Table 5-53 LED function definition


No. Indicator Function description
1 D17 A-12V power indicator
2 D20 A+12V power indicator
3 D21 A-5V power indicator
4 D22 A+5V power indicator
5 D39 Reserved for software use.
6 D40 Reserved for software use.
7 D41 Reserved for software use.
8 D42 Reserved for software use.
9 D43 Reserved for software use.
10 D44 Network conflict indicator. It turns on when network
conflicts.
11 D45 100M network communication indicator. It turns on
when enabled.
12 D46 10M network communication indicator. It turns on
when enabled.
13 D47 Network connection indicator. It turns on when
enabled.
14 D48 Network full-duplex communication indicator. It
turns on when enabled.
15 D49 FPGA configuration complete indicator. It turns on
when the configuration is done.
16 D51 D+5V power indicator

Function definition of test points

Table 5-54 Test points on data board

No. Test point Signal under test Function description


1 +12V AVCC +12V power supply of analog part
2 -12V AVSS -12V power supply of analog part

5-43
Hardware System

3 +5V AVDD +5V power supply of analog part


4 -5V AVEE -5V power supply of analog part
5 VR_MON +2.5V +2.5V power supply of analog part
6 VR_H +2.5V +2.5V power supply of analog part
Drive voltage of constant current source
7 +56V VCONST
of electrode
8 +12VM A+12V_MON +12V power supply monitoring
9 -12VM A-12V_MON -12V power supply monitoring
Monitor drive voltage of constant current
10 +56VM VCONSTM
source of electrode
11 RHOLE RHOLE RBC Aperture Voltage monitoring
12 WHOLE WHOLE WBC Aperture Voltage monitoring
13 FSBASE FSBASE FS background voltage monitoring
14 LASER LASER Laser diode drive current monitoring
15 HGB1 HGB1 HGB channel voltage value after I/V
16 NHGB #HGBLED HGB light on-off control
17 HGB HGB HGB measurement voltage value
18 NBURN #BURN Zapping control
Pulse control signals that produce
19 PULSE PULSE
zapping voltage
20 FS_IN FS_IN FS pre-amplification board output signals
21 FS1 FS1 Adjustable amplified FS signals
22 FS FS Analog signals outputted by FS channel
23 SS_IN SS_IN SS pre-amplification board output signals
24 SS1 SS1 Adjustable amplified SS signals
25 SS SS Analog signals outputted by SS channel
26 SF_IN SF_IN SF pre-amplification board output signals
27 SF1 SF1 Adjustable amplified SF signals
28 SF SF Analog signals outputted by SF channel
29 NCONST #CONST Constant current source control
RBC aperture zapping/constant current
30 NSEL_R #SELECT_RBC
selection control
WBC aperture zapping/constant current
31 NSEL_W #SELECT_WBC
selection control
RBC channel output signals of adjustable
32 RBC1 RBC1
amplification grade
RBC channel output signals of direct
33 RBC2 RBC2
current restoring grade
34 RBC3 RBC3 RBC channel output signals of low-pass

5-44
Hardware System

filter grade
35 RBC RBC RBC channel signals of output grade
PLT channel output signals of direct
36 PLT1 PLT1
current restoring grade
PLT channel output signals of low-pass
37 PLT2 PLT2
filter grade
38 PLT PLT PLT channel signals of output grade
RBC channel output signals of adjustable
39 WBC1 WBC1
amplification grade
WBC channel output signals of direct
40 WBC2 WBC2
current restoring grade
WBC channel output signals of low-pass
41 WBC3 WBC3
filter grade
42 WBC WBC WBC channel signals of output grade
43 HCLK HCLK HGB and clock of monitoring voltage
44 HGND HGND Analog ground
45 RBCF RBCF Signals inputted into AD from RBC
46 VR_R VR_R AD reference voltage of RBC
47 RAGND RAGND Analog ground
48 RCLK RCLK AD clock signals of RBC
49 WBCF WBCF Signals inputted into AD from WBC
50 VR_W VR_W AD reference voltage of WBC
51 WAGND WAGND Analog ground
52 WCLK WCLK AD clock signals of WBC
53 PLTF PLTF Signals inputted into AD from PLT
54 VR_P VR_P AD reference voltage of PLT
55 PAGND PAGND Analog ground
56 PCLK PCLK AD clock signals of PLT
57 MCLK MCLK AD clock of monitoring voltage
58 FSF FSF AD input from FS
59 FSCLK FSCLK AD clock signals of FS
60 SSF SSF AD input from SS
61 SSCLK SSCLK AD clock signals of SS
62 SFF SFF AD input from SF
63 SFCLK SFCLK AD clock signals of SF
64 TP8 MCF_FBAD1 Flexbus address data 1 of CPU
65 TP9 MCF_FBAD2 Flexbus address data 2 of CPU
66 TP37 FPGA_DDR_VRF VREF power of DDR on FPGA, +1.25V

5-45
Hardware System

67 TP45 VCC +5V digital power supply


68 TP46 VDD +3.3V digital power supply
69 TP47 D_1V5 +1.5V digital power supply
70 TP48 D_1V8 +1.8V digital power supply
71 TP57 D_1V2_FGPA +1.2V digital power supply
72 TP71 D_2V5 +2.5V digital power supply
73 TP74 #MCF_CS1 Flexbus CS1 of CPU
74 TP75 MCF_R/#W Flexbus read/write signals of CPU
75 TP76 MCF_FBAD6 Flexbus address data 6 of CPU
76 TP78 D_1V25VTT VTT power of DDR on CPU, +1.25V
77 TP79 #MCF_CS0 Flexbus CS0 of CPU
78 TP80 FPGA_DDR_2V5 +2.5V DDR power on FPGA
79 TP81 FPGA_DDR_VTT VTT power of DDR on FPGA, +1.25V
80 TP82 MCF_FBAD5 Flexbus address data 5 of CPU
81 TP83 D_1V25VRF VREF power of DDR on CPU, +1.25V
82 TP85 MCF_FBAD5 Flexbus address data 4 of CPU
83 TP86 #MCF_OE Output enabling of Flexbus of CPU
MCF_TS Address latch indication of Flexbus of
84 TP87
CPU
85 TP95 MCF_FBAD3 Flexbus address data 3 of CPU
86 TP96 #MCF_RSTI Reset input signals of CPU
87 TP101 #MCF_IRQ1 Interrupt input signals 1 of CPU
88 TP102 #MCF_IRQ2 Interrupt input signals 2 of CPU
89 TP103 #MCF_IRQ3 Interrupt input signals 3 of CPU
90 TP104 #MCF_IRQ5 Interrupt input signals 5 of CPU
91 TP105 #MCF_IRQ6 Interrupt input signals 6 of CPU
92 TP106 #MCF_IRQ7 Interrupt input signals 7 of CPU

AGND, TP10-21, TP38, TP44, TP70, TP73, TP77, TP88, TP90, TP92-94 and TP107-116 are
connected to the GND network and usually used as the connecting point of the oscilloscope
probe grounded end.

Data board key definition

Table 5-55 Key definition


No. Function
S12 Manually reset the main CPU

5-46
Hardware System

5.2.4 Disassembly and assembly method

Purpose

Damaged data board needs to be replaced by a new one..

Tools

107 cross-headed screwdriver


107 flat-headed screwdriver

Disassembly

Data board disassembly consists of the following two main procedures:


Remove the data board from the main unit:
1. Shut down the analyzer.
2. Remove the left door.
3. Remove the top cover board
4. Use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove the two cross-headed bolts (M3X6) from
the upper cover of the shielding box, and then remove the upper cover.
5. Disconnect the two power cables connected to the data board.
6. Use your hand or cross-headed screwdriver to remove the two hand-tightened screws
from the bracket.
7. Use both of your hands to flip outward the two latches on both sides of the data board, and
then draw the data board out.

Figure 5-11 Disassembly diagram of data board-1


1---Upper cover of the shielding box of 2---Cross-recessed panhead screw M3x6
data board (with washer)
3---Data board 4---Hand-tightened screws

5-47
Hardware System

Further disassembly of the data board


1. Use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove the 5 cross-headed panhead screws
(M3X6) from the data board.
2. Remove the data board from the bracket.
3. Use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove the 2 panhead screws (M3X8) and 6
socket cap screws (M3X12) from the lower cover of the shielding box.

Figure 5-12 Disassembly diagram of data board-2


1---Cross-recessed panhead screw 2---Data board
M3x6 (with washer)
3---Bracket 4---Lower cover of the shielding box of data
board
5---Panhead screw M4X8 6---Socket cap screws M3X12

Assembly

Assemble the data board as per the above-mentioned steps in the reverse order.

Verification

1. Power indicators D20, D17, D22, D21 and D51 turns on.
2. Indicator D49 turns on after FPGA initialization.
3. Indicator D47 and D48 turn on and D45 flashes after network is enabled.

5.2.5 Troubleshooting

The errors analysis and the corresponding troubleshooting of the analog part on data board

5-48
Hardware System

are listed in the following table. Most of the errors can be tested and determined by testing the
corresponding test points with a multimeter. A measurement value within the normal range
indicates the circuit or component is in good working condition. Otherwise, be sure to find out
the particular error according to the certain symptom and remove it accordingly.

Table 5-56 Troubleshooting of analog part

No. Error Character Possible Cause Recommended action


1 12V power The voltage of the Improper cable Reconnect the cable or
supply error +12V test point connection with change a new cable
exceeds the range the mother board
of 120.6V; or the or disconnection
ripple noise is caused by a
greater than 50mV. broken cable
Improper 12V Check whether the proper
power supply sent power supply is sent by the
by the mother mother board or the power
board or the board
power board
Inductor L16 or Re-solder or change the
capacitor C111, component
C95 and C88 are
damaged or not
properly soldered.
2 -12V power The voltage of the Improper cable Reconnect the cable or
supply error -12V test point connection with change a new cable
exceeds the range the mother board
of -120.6V; or the or disconnection
ripple noise is caused by a
greater than 50mV. broken cable
Improper -12V Check whether the proper
power supply sent power supply is sent by the
by the mother mother board or the power
board or the board
power board
Inductor L18 or Re-solder or change the
capacitor C112, component
C94 and C87 are
damaged or not
properly soldered

5-49
Hardware System

3 +5V power The voltage of the The +5V relating First ensure the +12V power
supply error +5V test point circuit is rosin supply works normally. Then,
exceeds the range jointed; the power check the +5V relating circuit,
of +50.25 V supplys re-solder or change the
impedance to the component.
ground is
decreased; or
power chip U14 is
damaged
4 -5V power The voltage of the The -5V relating First ensure the -12V power
supply error -5V test point circuit is rosin supply works normally. Then,
exceeds the range jointed; the power check the -5V relating circuit,
of -50.25 V supplys re-solder or change the
impedance to the component.
ground is
decreased; or
power chip U12 is
damaged
5 +2.5V reference The voltage of the If the +5V (AVDD) Check the relating circuit;
power supply VR_MON or VR_H power supply re-solder or change the
error test point exceeds works normally, component
the range of then the problem
2.50.125 V occurres probably
because power
chip U45 or U43,
and its peripheral
components are
damaged or not
properly soldered.
6 +56 constant The voltage of the The boost circuit Check the chip U72, U70,
current drive VCONST test point works improperly U71 and their peripherals for
power supply exceeds the range any rosin joint or damage
error of 563V The 56V Re-solder or change the
voltage-regulator component
diode is damaged
or not properly
soldered.

5-50
Hardware System

7 +56V monitoring The voltage of the If the +56V power Check the U39 and relating
voltage error +56VM test point supply works components; re-solder or
exceeds the range normally, then the change the component
of 1.370.2V problem occurred
probably because
something is
wrong with the
monitoring circuit..
8 +12V monitoring The voltage of the The relating circuit If the +12V power supply
voltage error +12VM test point is not properly works normally, check U40
exceeds the range soldered; the and the relating components,
of 1.8V-2.2V power supplys re-solder or change the
impendence to the component.
ground is
decreased;
Something is
wrong with the
power IC or the
corresponding AD.
9 -12V monitoring The voltage of the The relating circuit Check U40 and the relating
voltage error -12VM test point is not properly components, re-solder or
exceeds the range soldered; the change the component under
of 2.2V-2.6V power supplys the circumstance that the
impendence to the -12V power supply works
ground is normally
decreased;
Something is
wrong with the
power IC or the
corresponding AD.
10 RBC aperture The value of the Constant current Check whether the constant
voltage aperture voltage source control current source control signals
monitoring error exceeds the range signals abnormal, are normal. See the
of 10V-14V 56V foregoing troubleshooting to
voltage-regulator remove the error of 56V
diode abnormal or circuit.
boost circuit error
Bath not properly Check the bath wiring;
wired; clogging. perform the unclogging
procedure

5-51
Hardware System

Monitoring circuit Components of Check whether the relating


error the monitoring circuit or AD works normally.
circuit are not
properly soldered,
or the
corresponding AD
works abnormally.
11 WBC aperture Same as point 10 Same as point 10 Same as point 10
voltage
monitoring error
12 HGB HGB value of the HGB light error or Check whether HGB light is
background test point exceeds the gain on, or adjust the gain multiple
voltage the normal range of HGB channel
abnormal (4.2V-4.8V) The Check whether the
corresponding AD corresponding AD works
works abnormally, normally.
or the error
message is
accidentally
triggered by
improper wiring.
13 FS background The value of the The flow cell is Clean the flow cell in time, or
voltage FSBASE test point dirty, or something check whether the U38 and
monitoring error exceeds the normal is wrong with the the corresponding AD chip
range (0-400mv) corresponding U44 work normally.
monitoring circuit
error.

14 Laser diode The value of the Something is Check whether the cable is
drive current LASER test point wrong with the properly connected to the
monitoring error exceeds the range current value sent laser control board and
of 1.0-3.0V. by the laser whether the monitoring value
control board sent from the laser control
board is normal

5-52
Hardware System

Data board Check whether the operation


monitoring circuit amplifier U38 and the
error, the corresponding AD chip U44
corresponding AD work normally.
error or
connection cable
abnormal
15 RBC aperture No sound is heard Something is Ensuring the wiring of the
zapping error and no bubbles are wrong with the bath is correct, then check
produced when zapping voltage whether the AC120V zapping
zapping the bath supplied by the power of the power board is
power board, or proper, or check whether the
with the part of the zapping control signals are
data board that effective.
controls zapping.
16 WBC aperture Same as point 15 Same as point 15 Same as point 15
zapping error
17 No No WBC/RBC/PLT Bath wiring error, Use a oscilloscope to check
WBC/RBC/PLT result, or the result analog part whether the analog channel
result displays *** channel error, AD can output correct signals. If
collection error or no signal is detected,,
algorithm check the amplification stage
identification error by stage, and check the AD
collection and data uploading
as well.
18 WBC/RBC/PLT WBC/RBC/PLT Bad shielding, First ensure the bath and the
background background constant current fluidics work normally, and
abnormal abnormal source abnormal, then check the shielding and
analog channel grounding, check
resistor-capacitor components (such as
components resistors) of the constant
incorrect or current source, or check the
abnormal resistor-capacitor and
operation amplifier of the
signal conditioning channel.

5-53
Hardware System

Table 5-57 Troubleshooting of digital part


No. Error Causes and solutions
1 System startup failed Possible causes: input power supply error, including
improper power cord connection, abnormal power
supply voltage on each board, flash chip error that
causes the operating system to fail to be
downloaded into DDR SDRAM; DDR SDRAM error
that causes the system to fail to operate; Or system
clock abnormal.
Solutions: press the S12 key to reset the system,
and then check whether the error still exists; check
whether the power indicator D51 is on; check
whether the fuse F4 is broken; use a multimeter to
check the voltage of each power supply; use an
oscilloscope to check whether the clock crystal
oscillator output X2 is normal.
2 Network communication failed Possible causes: network connection abnormal;
using non-standard network cable; network chip
damaged, etc.
Solutions: directly connect the analyzer and PC with
the specified shielding-cross network cable. If
nothing is wrong with the network connection and the
settings, then check the crystal oscillator X3 output
by an oscilloscope. If you doubt the network chip
U36 is damaged, replace it with a new one.
3 Abnormal communication with Possible causes: improper connection; interface chip
UART of autoloader board U66 damaged.
Solutions: check and make sure the connection is
proper; check whether the interface signals are
normal by an oscilloscope.
4 volumetric board signals, laser Possible causes: improper connection; interface chip
shielding box status and right U74 damaged.
door status can not be detected Solutions: check and make sure the connection is
proper; check the interface signals by an
oscilloscope.
5 Abnormal communication with Possible causes: improper connection; interface chip
UART of drive board U67 damaged.
Solutions: check and make sure the connection is
proper; check the interface signals by an
oscilloscope.

5-54
Hardware System

6 Events of Aspirate Key, Count Possible causes: improper connection; interface chip
Key and Compartment Door U67 damaged.
Open Key can not be detected, Solutions: check and make sure the connection is
or the buzzer and indicator on proper; check the interface signals by an
the indicator board are out of oscilloscope.
control.

5-55
Hardware System

5.3 Drive board

5.3.1 Introduction
The drive board realizes the following functions: 1) driving motors, pumps, valves and heaters
etc. 2) detecting such signals as the motor position and liquid levels; 3) collecting the signals of
temperature, pressure and voltage etc. for AD conversion.

5.3.2 Board composition


Function

Serial communication
Driving stepping motors
Driving valves and pumps
Temperature control
Pressure control
System status detection
Reagent status detection

Block diagram
DIR A
2-channel temperature measurement MS1
2-channel pressure measurement AN
3-channel power voltage measurement MS2 B MOTOR
A3979
STEP BN
SLEEP
ALE
Temperature HOLD
Pressure WR
Power Voltage RD
(anolog signal) 8
8-channel Step-motor driver module
A/D[7:0]

A[15:8] IN
Databoard TXD
EN
UART RXD F_INT CLK M54972 SV1~SV8
C8051F020 F_NCONFIG LATCH 8
TMS EP1C6Q240C8
NCSO
Databoard TDI
DATA
JTAG CLK 40-channel solenoid valve control
DCLK
TDO
ASDO

M_SEN
CD74HC14 HOA0880-T51
Pump
Heater
6 20-channel motor position sensor detection
EPCS1S18N

7-channel high power pump & valve control L-SEN/SWITCH Liquid level sensor or
2-channel heater control CD74HC14
sensitive switch

8-channel liquid level sensor & 4-channel sensitive switch detection

Figure 5-13 Block diagram of drive board

5-56
Hardware System

Description

Serial communication
The main control unit of the drive board is a MCU, which has two asynchronous serial
communication interfaces (UART). UART0 is used for asynchronous serial communication
with the data board. It receives and analyzes control commands sent by the data board, and
responds accordingly. Communication parameters:
Baud Rate: 38400bps
Start bit: 1bit
Data bit: 8 bits
Stop bit: 1bit
Parity: even

UART1 is reserved.

Stepping motor driving


The drive board controls stepping motors through an FPGA. After output by the FPGA, the
control signal is first sent to isolator 74AHCT245, and then to controller A3979 to drive the
motor. The drive board drives 8 stepping motors: the sample syringe motor, the sample
injection syringe motor, the sheath syringe motor, the diluent syringe motor, the lyse syringe
motor, the horizontal motor and the vertical motor.

Valve and pump driving


The drive board provides the drive control for 40 valves and 7 pumps and actually drives 34
valves, 1 pressure pump and 2 vacuum pumps (also be used as the waste pump). The MCU
writes control information of valve SV1-SV40 into the valve buffer of the FGPA. Based on the
data, the FPGA outputs valve control signals through the serial-parallel conversion chip
M54972. The MCU first sends the control information of PUMP1-PUMP3 to isolator
74AHCT245, and then to the drive chip ULN2068 to control the 3 pumps respectively. Pinch
valve SV39 is driven by the PUMP4 channel (it is beyond M54972s driving capacity).

Temperature Control
The temperature control circuit keeps temperature of the reaction bath (DIFF bath) and the
optical system constant. By comparing the temperature measurements and the target values,
the MCU turns on/off the heater to control the temperature of each channel. The MC sends
heater control signals to isolator 74AHCT245, then to driver FDS6670A to control the two
heaters.

Air pressure control


The pressure control circuit controls the pressure of the vacuum chamber and the pressure

5-57
Hardware System

chamber. The pressure signals (voltage signals) sent by the volumetric board are measured by
the drive board. Through voltage follower LM358, the signals are then sent to the ADC pin of
the MCU for AD conversion and corresponding operation. Then, the control signals are output
to turn on/off the pressure pump or the vacuum pump, thus, the pressure of each chamber is
adjusted.
System status detection
The drive board detects the ambient temperature and the voltage of power supply. The mother
board sends the inquiry command to obtain the corresponding system status parameter.
Ambient temperature sensor is located on the interface board. After I/V conversion and
amplification, the signals outputted by the temperature sensor are sent to the MCU for AD
conversion and operation, then the temperature value is obtained.
The voltage detection circuit detects all the power supplies (24V, 12V and 5V) on the drive
board.

Reagent status detection


The reagent status is detected by the passive float switch. There are totally 8 reagent detection
channels on the drive board as designed, and 6 channels of them are in use to detect the
following reagents: LEO1, LEO2, LH, cleanser, diluent and waste.

Interface definition
The drive board connects the motherboard via the 3 DIN41612 plugs and 3 DIN41612
receptacles located on the two boards respectively. All the drive-board-relating peripherals
(including valves, pumps, heaters, motors and sensors etc.) are connected to the motherboard
directly. The connectors layout and the corresponding connections are shown in the figure
below.

5-58
Hardware System

Position sensor Liquid level sensor Valve


JTAG Optical train temperature PUMP
UART Reaction pool temperature Heater
Pressure Ambient temperature 2-channel step-motor
6-channel step-motor
+5V +24V +12V
Base board

PB1 Socket PB2 Socket PB3 Socket


J4 J5 J3
Board mounting
bracket & guide 96Pin
Socket 96Pin
channel

Driver board
J9
Support board
J1 J10 J8 J2

Figure 5-14 Interfaces layout of drive board


The functions of the interfaces are listed in the table.

Table 5-58 Interfaces on the driver board

Number of
Connector Function Note
pins
FPGA configuration interface Used when FPGA first
J1 10
(AS mode) downloading
J2 FPGA Debug Interface 10 Not used on complete device
Control interface of valves,
J3 Interface with the motherboard 96
pumps and heaters
Sensor detection and
J4 Interface with the motherboard 96
communication interface
J5 Interface with the motherboard 96 Motor control interface
J8 Communication Debug Interface 4 Not used on complete device
Used when MCU first
J9 MCU Debug Interface 10
downloading
J10 Communication Debug Interface 4 Not used on complete device

Definition of J1
J1 is the FPGA configuration interface (AS mode).

5-59
Hardware System

Table 5-59 Definition of the interface for FPGA configuration

Pin Name Pin Name


1 F_DCLK 2 AGND
3 F_CONFDONE 4 VDD
5 F_CONFIG 6 F_NCE
7 F_DATA 8 F_NCSC
9 F_ASDO 10 GND

Definition of J2
J2 is the FPGA debug interface (JTAG mode).

Definition of J3
J3 connects to the PB3 connector of the motherboard, and is the interface used for valves,
pumps and heaters control.

Table 5-60 Valve/pump interface- Definition of J3

Pin Definition Note


1
2
3
4
5
6
7 PGND Power ground
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16 12V0 12V power supply
17
18
19 SV1 Control signal for Valve 1
20 SV4 Control signal for Valve 4
21 SV7 Control signal for Valve 7
22 SV10 Control signal for Valve 10

5-60
Hardware System

23 SV13 Control signal for Valve 13


24 SV16 Control signal for Valve 16
25 SV19 Control signal for Valve 19
26 SV22 Control signal for Valve 22
27 SV25 Control signal for Valve 25
28 SV28 Control signal for Valve 28
29 SV31 Control signal for Valve 31
30 SV34 Control signal for Valve 34
31 SV37 Control signal for Valve 37
32 SV40 Control signal for Valve 40
Connecting end A of A-phase winding of the sample probe
33 M7-A
X motor (SM 7)
Connecting end AN of A-phase winding of the sample probe
34 M7-AN
X motor (SM 7)
Connecting end B of B-phase winding of the sample probe
35 M7-B
X motor (SM 7)
Connecting end BN of B-phase winding of the sample probe
36 M7-BN
X motor (SM 7)
Connecting end A of A-phase winding of the sample probe
37 M8-A
Y motor (SM 8)
Connecting end AN of A-phase winding of the sample probe
38 M8-AN
Y motor (SM 8)
Connecting end B of B-phase winding of the sample probe
39 M8-B
Y motor (SM 8)
Connecting end BN of B-phase winding of the sample probe
40 M8-BN
Y motor (SM 8)
41 HT1-DRV Control end of the reaction bath heater
42 HT2-DRV Control end of the optical system heater
43 PGND Power ground
44 PUMP7 Control signal for Pump 7
45 PUMP6 Control signal for Pump 6
46 PUMP5 Control signal for Pump 5
47 PUMP4 Control signal for pinch valve V39
48 PUMP3 Control signal for the Vacuum/Waste Pump (P3)
49 PUMP2 Control signal for the Vacuum/Waste Pump (P2)
50 PUMP1 Control signal for pressure pump (P1)
51 Sv2 Control signal for Valve 2
52 SV5 Control signal for Valve 5
53 SV8 Control signal for Valve 8

5-61
Hardware System

54 SV11 Control signal for Valve 11


55 SV14 Control signal for Valve 14
56 SV17 Control signal for Valve 17
57 SV20 Control signal for Valve 20
58 SV23 Control signal for Valve 23
59 SV26 Control signal for Valve 26
60 SV29 Control signal for Valve 29
61 SV32 Control signal for Valve 32
62 SV35 Control signal for Valve 35
63 SV38 Control signal for Valve 38
64 NC Empty
Connecting end A of A-phase winding of the sample probe
65 M7-A
X motor (SM 7)
Connecting end AN of A-phase winding of the sample probe
66 M7-AN
X motor (SM 7)
Connecting end B of B-phase winding of the sample probe
67 M7-B
X motor (SM 7)
Connecting end BN of B-phase winding of the sample probe
68 M7-BN
X motor (SM 7)
Connecting end A of A-phase winding of the sample probe
69 M8-A
Y motor (SM 8)
Connecting end AN of A-phase winding of the sample probe
70 M8-AN
Y motor (SM 8)
Connecting end B of B-phase winding of the sample probe
71 M8-B
Y motor (SM 8)
Connecting end BN of B-phase winding of the sample probe
72 M8-BN
Y motor (SM 8)
73 HT1-DRV Control end of the reaction bath heater
74 HT2-DRV Control end of the optical system heater
75 PGND Power ground
76 PUMP7 Control signal for Pump 7
77 PUMP6 Control signal for Pump 6
78 PUMP5 Control signal for Pump 5
79 PUMP4 Control signal for pinch valve V39
80 PUMP3 Control signal for the Vacuum/Waste Pump (P3)
81 PUMP2 Control signal for the Vacuum/Waste Pump (P2)
82 PUMP1 Control signal for pressure pump (P1)
83 SV3 Control signal for Valve 3
84 SV6 Control signal for Valve 6

5-62
Hardware System

85 SV9 Control signal for Valve 9


86 SV12 Control signal for Valve 12
87 SV15 Control signal for Valve 15
88 SV18 Control signal for Valve 18
89 SV21 Control signal for Valve 21
90 SV24 Control signal for Valve 24
91 SV27 Control signal for Valve 27
92 SV30 Control signal for Valve 30
93 SV33 Control signal for Valve 33
94 SV36 Control signal for Valve 36
Control signal for Valve 39 (signal outputted but
95 SV39
disconnected with the Valve 39)
96 NC Empty

Definition of J4
J4 connects to the PB1 connector of the motherboard, and is the interface used for sensor
detection and communication.

Table 5-61 Sensors/Communication interfaces-Definition of J4

Pin Name Note


1 PRTO_T1 Temperature sensor signal end of heater 1 (reaction bath)
2 PRTO_T2 Temperature sensor signal end of heater 2 (optical system)
3 PRESSURE_1ST_A Input signal of pressure sensor 1 (Pressure)
4
5
6
7
GND GND
8
9
10
11
12
13
14 VCC 5V power supply
15
16
17 GND GND
18 LIQ_SIN1 Input signal of LEO1 lyse liquid-level sensor
19 LIQ_SIN3 Input signal of LH lyse liquid-level sensor

5-63
Hardware System

20 LIQ_SIN5 Input signal of liquid-level sensor5 (reserved)


21 LIQ_SIN7 Input signal of waste liquid-level sensor
22 LS_CTRL Control signal for liquid-level sampling
23 GND Digital ground
24 VC_SIN17 Sending end power signal of position sensor 17 (reserved)
25 VC_SIN18 Sending end power signal of position sensor 18 (reserved)
26 VC_SIN19 Sending end power signal of position sensor 19 (reserved)
27 VC_SIN20 Sending end power signal of position sensor 20 (reserved)
Sending end power signal of sampling syringe initial position
28 VC_SIN1
sensor (OP1)
Receiving end feedback signal of sample injection syringe
29 M_SIN2
initial position sensor (OP 2)
Sending end power signal of lyse syringe initial position
30 VC_SIN4
sensor (OP 4)
Receiving end feedback signal of diluent syringe initial position
31 M_SIN5
sensor (OP 5)
32 VC_SIN7 Sending end power signal of position sensor 7 (reserved)
33 PRTO_REF Reference end of heater temperature sensor signal
34 PRTO_REF Reference end of heater temperature sensor signal
35 PRESSURE_2ST_A Input signal of pressure sensor 2 (vacuum)
36
37
38
39
GND Digital ground
40
41
42
43
44
45
46 VCC 5V power supply
47
48
49 GND Digital ground
50 LIQ_SIN2 Input signal of LEO2 lyse liquid-level sensor
51 LIQ_SIN4 Input signal of cleanser liquid-level sensor
52 LIQ_SIN6 Input signal of diluent liquid-level sensor
53 LIQ_SIN8 Input signal of liquid-level sensor 8 (reserved)

5-64
Hardware System

54
GND Digital ground
55
Receiving end feedback signal of position sensor 17
56 M_SIN17
(reserved)
Receiving end feedback signal of position sensor 18
57 M_SIN18
(reserved)
Receiving end feedback signal of position sensor 19
58 M_SIN19
(reserved)
Receiving end feedback signal of position sensor 20
59 M_SIN20
(reserved)
Receiving end feedback signal of sampling syringe initial
60 M_SIN1
position sensor (OP 1)
Sending end power signal of sheath syringe initial position
61 VC_SIN3
sensor (OP 3)
Receiving end feedback signal of lyse syringe initial position
62 M_SIN4
sensor (OP 4)
Sending end power signal of relieve valve position sensor (OP
63 VC_SIN6
6)
64 M_SIN7 Receiving end feedback signal of position sensor 7 (reserved)
65 AMBINET_T_A Input signal of ambient temperature sensor
66
67
68
69
70
GND Digital ground
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78 VCC 5V power supply
79
80
81 GND Digital ground
82 TMS TMS signal of JTAG interface
83 TCK Clock signal of JTAG interface
84 TDI Data input pin of JTAG interface

5-65
Hardware System

85 TDO Data output pin of JTAG interface


86
GND Digital ground
87
88 UP_TX Serial port sending data signal (UART0)
89 UP_RX Serial port receiving data signal (UART0)
90
GND Digital ground
91
Sending end power signal of sample injection syringe initial
92 VC_SIN2
position sensor (OP 2)
Receiving end feedback signal of sheath syringe initial
93 M_SIN3
position sensor (OP 3)
Sending end power signal of diluent syringe initial position
94 VC_SIN5
sensor (OP 5)
Receiving end feedback signal of relieve valve position sensor
95 M_SIN6
(OP 6)
96 VC_SIN8 Sending end power signal of position sensor 8 (reserved)

Definition of J5
J5 connects to the PB2 connector of the motherboard, and is the interface used for the
stepping motor control and the position sensor signal detection.

Table 5-62 Stepping motor control interface-definition of J5

Pin Definition Note


1 M_SIN8 Receiving end feedback signal of position sensor 8 (reserved)
2 VC_SEN10 Sending end power signal of autoloading position sensor (OP 10)
3 M_SIN11 Receiving end feedback signal of position sensor 11 (reserved)
4 VC_SEN13 Sending end power signal of WBC bath position sensor (OP 13)
Receiving end feedback signal of RBC bath position sensor (OP
5 M_SIN14
14)
Sending end power signal of sample probe Y lower position sensor
6 VC_SEN16
(OP 16)
7 GND Digital ground
8 NC Empty
9 24V0 24V power supply
10
11
12
13
14

5-66
Hardware System

15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
PGND Power ground
29
30
31
32
33 VC_SEN9 Sending end power signal of close tube position sensor (OP 9)
Receiving end feedback signal of autoloading position sensor (OP
34 M_SIN10
10)
35 VC_SEN12 Sending end power signal of DIFF bath position sensor (OP 12)
Receiving end feedback signal of WBC bath position sensor (OP
36 M_SIN13
13)
Sending end power signal of sample probe Y upper position sensor
37 VC_SEN15
(OP 15)
Receiving end feedback signal of sample probe Y lower position
38 M_SIN16
sensor (OP 16)
39 GND Digital ground
40 NC Empty
Connecting end A of A-phase winding of the sample syringe motor
41 M1_A
(SM 1)
Connecting end AN of A-phase winding of the sample syringe
42 M1_AN
motor (SM 1)
Connecting end B of B-phase winding of the sample syringe motor
43 M1_B
(SM 1)
Connecting end BN of B-phase winding of the sample syringe
44 M1_BN
motor (SM 1)
45 M2_A Connecting end A of A-phase winding of the sample injection

5-67
Hardware System

syringe motor (SM 2)


Connecting end AN of A-phase winding of the sample injection
46 M2_AN
syringe motor (SM 2)
Connecting end B of B-phase winding of the sample injection
47 M2_B
syringe motor (SM 2)
Connecting end BN of B-phase winding of the sample injection
48 M2_BN
syringe motor (SM 2)
Connecting end A of A-phase winding of the sheath syringe motor
49 M3_A
(SM 3)
Connecting end AN of A-phase winding of the sheath syringe motor
50 M3_AN
(SM 3)
Connecting end B of B-phase winding of the sheath syringe motor
51 M3_B
(SM 3)
Connecting end BN of B-phase winding of the sheath syringe motor
52 M3_BN
(SM 3)
Connecting end A of A-phase winding of the lyse syringe motor (SM
53 M4_A
4)
Connecting end AN of A-phase winding of the lyse syringe motor
54 M4_AN
(SM 4)
Connecting end B of B-phase winding of the lyse syringe motor
55 M4_B
(SM 4)
Connecting end BN of B-phase winding of the lyse syringe motor
56 M4_BN
(SM 4)
Connecting end A of A-phase winding of the diluent syringe motor
57 M5_A
(SM 5)
Connecting end AN of A-phase winding of the diluent syringe motor
58 M5_AN
(SM 5)
Connecting end B of B-phase winding of the diluent syringe motor
59 M5_B
(SM 5)
Connecting end BN of B-phase winding of the diluent syringe motor
60 M5_BN
(SM 5)
Connecting end A of A-phase winding of the reserved motor (SM 6,
61 M6_A
reserved)
Connecting end AN of A-phase winding of the reserved motor (SM
62 M6_AN
6, reserved)
Connecting end B of B-phase winding of the reserved motor (SM 6,
63 M6_B
reserved)
Connecting end BN of B-phase winding of the reserved motor (SM
64 M6_BN
6, reserved)

5-68
Hardware System

65 M_SIN9 Receiving end feedback signal of close tube position sensor (OP 9)
66 VC_SEN11 Sending end power signal of position sensor 11 (reserved)
Receiving end feedback signal of DIFF bath position sensor (OP
67 M_SIN12
12)
68 VC_SEN14 Sending end power signal of RBC bath position sensor (OP 14)
Receiving end feedback signal of sample probe Y upper position
69 M_SIN15
sensor (OP 15)
70 DCM DC motor control signal (reserved)
71 GND Digital ground
72 NC Empty
Connecting end A of A-phase winding of the sample syringe motor
73 M1_A
(SM 1)
Connecting end AN of A-phase winding of the sample syringe
74 M1_AN
motor (SM 1)
Connecting end B of B-phase winding of the sample syringe motor
75 M1_B
(SM 1)
Connecting end BN of B-phase winding of the sample syringe
76 M1_BN
motor (SM 1)
Connecting end A of A-phase winding of the sample injection
77 M2_A
syringe motor (SM 2)
Connecting end AN of A-phase winding of the sample injection
78 M2_AN
syringe motor (SM 2)
Connecting end B of B-phase winding of the sample injection
79 M2_B
syringe motor (SM 2)
Connecting end BN of B-phase winding of the sample injection
80 M2_BN
syringe motor (SM 2)
Connecting end A of A-phase winding of the sheath syringe motor
81 M3_A
(SM 3)
Connecting end AN of A-phase winding of the sheath syringe motor
82 M3_AN
(SM 3)
Connecting end B of B-phase winding of the sheath syringe motor
83 M3_B
(SM 3)
Connecting end BN of B-phase winding of the sheath syringe motor
84 M3_BN
(SM 3)
Connecting end A of A-phase winding of the lyse syringe motor (SM
85 M4_A
4)
Connecting end AN of A-phase winding of the lyse syringe motor
86 M4_AN
(SM 4)
87 M4_B Connecting end B of B-phase winding of the lyse syringe motor

5-69
Hardware System

(SM 4)
Connecting end BN of B-phase winding of the lyse syringe motor
88 M4_BN
(SM 4)
Connecting end A of A-phase winding of the diluent syringe motor
89 M5_A
(SM 5)
Connecting end AN of A-phase winding of the diluent syringe motor
90 M5_AN
(SM 5)
Connecting end B of B-phase winding of the diluent syringe motor
91 M5_B
(SM 5)
Connecting end BN of B-phase winding of the diluent syringe motor
92 M5_BN
(SM 5)
Connecting end A of A-phase winding of the reserved motor (SM 6,
93 M6_A
reserved)
Connecting end AN of A-phase winding of the reserved motor (SM
94 M6_AN
6, reserved)
Connecting end B of B-phase winding of the reserved motor (SM 6,
95 M6_B
reserved)
Connecting end BN of B-phase winding of the reserved motor (SM
96 M6_BN
6, reserved)

Definition of J8
J8 is the interface used for communication debugging.

Definition of J9
J9 is the MCU debug interface (JTAG mode).

Table 5-63 FPGA debug interface-definition of J9

Pin Name Pin Name


1 VDD 2 GND
3 GND 4 TCK
5 TMS 6 TDO
7 TDI 8 NC
9 GND 10 NC

Definition of J10
J10 is the interface used for communication debugging.

5-70
Hardware System

Assembly drawing

Figure 5-15 Assembly drawing of the drive board

5.3.3 Adjustment and Test Points

LED function definition

Table 5-64 LED definition

Indicator Note

D1 FPGA configuration status indicator. It turns on during FPGA configuration.

FPGA working status indicator. It flashes every 1s when FPGA works


D2
normally.
24V power supply (24V0) status indicator. It turns on when the 24V power
D49
supply is normal.
3.3V power supply (VDD) status indicator. It turns on when the 3.3V power
D50
supply is normal.
12V power supply (12V0) status indicator. It turns on when the 12V power
D51
supply is normal.
5V power supply (VDD) status indicator. It turns on when the 5V analog
D52
power supply is normal.

5-71
Hardware System

D65 MCU working status indicator. It flashes every 1s when MCU works normally.

D66 Working status indicator of optical system heater. It turns on during heating.

Working status indicator of reaction bath (DIFF bath). It turns on during


D67
heating.

Function definition of test points

Table 5-65 Test point definition

No. Name Pin Note

1 TP1 PIN26 of U2 FPGA configuration signals F_NCONFIG


FPGA 24.5454MHz clock input signals
2 TP2 PIN28 of U2
FPGA_CLK
Address latch enabling signals of MCU
3 TP3 PIN228 of U2
external bus ALE
4 TP4 PIN50 of U2 Read signals of MCU external bus /RD

5 TP5 PIN20 of U2 FPGA interrupt request signals FPGA_INT

6 TP6 PIN73 of U2 Write signals of MCU external bus /WR

7 TP7 PIN11 of U2 FPGA reset signals F_RST


Voltage of +1.5VDC power supply
8 TP8 1V5
(1.50.075V)
9 TP9 SIO_IN Data input signals of MCU valve control chip

10 TP10 SIO_CLK Clock signals of MCU valve control chip

11 TP11 SIO_EN Enabling signals of MCU valve control chip

12 TP12 SIO_LATCH Data latch signals of MCU valve control chip


Stepping pulse signals of sample probe X
13 TP13 PIN17 of U10
motor STEP7
Stepping pulse signals of sample probe Y
14 TP14 PIN15 of U9
motor STEP8
Stepping pulse signals of sample syringe
15 TP16 PIN15 of U21
motor STEP1
Stepping pulse signals of sample injection
16 TP17 PIN13 of U20
syringe motor STEP2
Stepping pulse signals of sheath syringe
17 TP18 PIN17 of U20
motor STEP3
Stepping pulse signals of lyse syringe motor
18 TP19 PIN17 of U25
STEP4

5-72
Hardware System

Stepping pulse signals of diluent syringe


19 TP20 PIN16 of U26
motor STEP5
Stepping pulse signals of reserved motor
20 TP21 PIN11 of U10
STEP6 (not used)
Voltage of +3.3VDC power supply
21 TP22 VDD
(3.30.15V)
22 TP23
GND Digital ground
23 TP24
Voltage of +1.5VDC power supply
24 TP25 1V5
(1.50.075V)
Ambient temperature detection signals
25 TP26 PIN1 of U32
(voltage) AMBINET_T
Detection signals of VCC+5VDC after
26 TP27 ADC_VCC
voltage-dividing 2.000.15V
Detection signals of 12V0(+12VDC) after
27 TP28 ADC_12V
voltage-dividing 2.130.15V
Detection signals of 24V0(+24VDC) after
28 TP29 ADC_24V
voltage-dividing 2.230.15V
Pressure chamber detection signals
29 TP30 PIN1 of U33
(voltage) PRESSURE_1ST
Vacuum chamber detection signals
30 TP31 PIN7 of U33
(voltage) PRESSURE_2ST
Reference voltage of MCU analog-to-digital
31 TP34 PIN2 of U37
module REFIN2.500.006V
Voltage of MCU digital-to-analog output
34 TP35 PIN100 of U35
channel 0
MCU 25.5454MHz clock input signals
35 TP36 PIN26 of U35
CLKIN
Voltage of MCU digital-to-analog output
36 TP37 PIN99 of U35
channel 1
37 TP38 PIN57 of U35 MCU system clock output signals SYSCLK
Amplifier output signals of the temperature
38 TP39 PIN6 of U45
collection module TEMPER_AD
Basic voltage of the amplifier input signals
39 TP40 PRTD_REF
of the temperature collection module
Reference voltage of temperature collection
40 TP41 PIN2 of U45
module amplifier
41 TP42 PIN3 of U45 Input voltage of temperature collection

5-73
Hardware System

module amplifier
Driving reference voltage of sample syringe
42 TP43 PIN8 of U22
motor VREF1
Driving reference voltage of sample
43 TP44 PIN8 of U23
injection syringe motor VREF2
Driving reference voltage of sheath syringe
44 TP45 PIN8 of U24
motor VREF3
Driving reference voltage of lyse syringe
45 TP46 PIN8 of U29
motor VREF4
Driving reference voltage of diluent syringe
46 TP47 PIN8 of U28
motor VREF5
Driving reference voltage of reserved motor
47 TP48 PIN8 of U27
VREF6 (not used)
Driving reference voltage of sample probe X
48 TP49 PIN8 of U11
motor VREF7
Driving reference voltage of sample probe Y
49 TP50 PIN8 of U13
motor VREF8

Key definition

The reset switch S1 on the drive board is used to reset the drive board manually. Press the
reset switch to reset the MCU and FPGA.

5.3.4 Disassembly and assembly method


Purpose

The drive board is a key component. Please maintain or replace the drive board immediately if
any error or damage occurs. Please follow the procedures to have the drive board replaced.

Tools

107 cross-headed screwdriver


107 flat-headed screwdriver

Disassembly

Drive board disassembly consists of the following two main procedures:


Remove the drive board from the main unit:
1. Shutdown the analyzer and cut off the power supply;
2. Open the left door;
3. Use your hand or cross-headed screwdriver to remove the two hand-tightened screws

5-74
Hardware System

from the bracket.


4. Use both of your hands to flip outward the two latches on both sides of the drive board,
and then draw the drive board out.

Figure 5-16 Assembly drawing of drive board-1


1---Hand-tightened screws 2---Drive board

Further disassembly of the drive board


1. Use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove the 5 cross-headed panhead screws
(M3X6) from the drive board.
2. Remove the drive board from the bracket.

Figure 5-17 Assembly drawing of drive board-2


1---Drive board 2---Bracket
3---Cross-recessed panhead screw
M3x6 (with washer)

5-75
Hardware System

Assembly

Please assemble the data board as per the above-mentioned steps in the reverse order.

Wear antistatic gloves before maintaining or removing the board.

Be sure to shut down the analyzer and cut off the power supply before
disassembling/assembling the board.

Verification

1. Check and make sure that all the components are properly connected to the drive board.
2. First ensure the power supply is cut off, then assemble the drive board and motherboard
properly, then power on the analyzer.
3. Check if the indicators on the dive board are in the following status: 1) D49, D50 and D51
turn on; 2) D2 and D65 flash. You can also check the indicators in the self-test screen of
the analyzer. If the self-test is passed, it means the driver board is replaced successfully;
otherwise, you should troubleshoot the board.

5.3.5 Troubleshooting

Error analysis and solutions

Errors related to the drive board are identified and handled by the host control software in the
form of error codes. Note that only some of the error codes reported to the host control
software from the dive board can be handled automatically, while some need to be judged with
the help of the users or service engineers. When error is reported, the error No. and error
names are provided by host control software. The recommended solutions may appear on the
screen as the software help information.
When you check for errors, first ensure the board is well fixed and all the error-related
connections are properly connected. For example, when Sample probe action failed is
reported, you should check: 1) whether the sample probe assembly is properly connected to
the board; 2) whether the connecters are well connected (in case of bad connection, shut
down the analyzer and cut off the power supply, and then re-plug the connecters); 3)whether
the connection inside the sample probe assembly is proper; 4) whether the symbol on the
sensor connecting line corresponds to the sensor position; 5) whether the symbol on the motor
connecting line corresponds to the motor position (See 6.6.1 for how to disassemble the
sample probe assembly if necessary).
Only when you make sure that nothing is wrong with the connections can you remove the error
according to the recommended action in the following table. If the error still exists after the

5-76
Hardware System

error causes are found and new components are replaced, you need to replace the drive
board.
The error codes, error names and recommended solutions are listed in the following table.

Table 5-66 Troubleshooting common errors


Error Recommended
Error name Error feature
code action
FPGA does not allow the MCU write
data into the valve-pump data
register within 50ms, i.e. the serial
output status indication bit in the
0100 Valve output failed Replace drive board
register (which is used to judge the
status of valves and pumps of
FPGA) is always 1. It might be FPGA
error or MCU read register error.
Valve NO. out of Communication
Download Valve NO. out of limit
0101 limit (greater than abnormal. Please
(greater than 40 or equal to 0)
40 or equal to 0) try again.
1. X motor error,
X motor failed to action is interfered.
X motor does not move to the
0201 move to target 2. X motor target
pre-set target position after action
position position
photocoupler error.
1. X motor error,
X motor failed to
action is interfered.
move to home X motor is not at the home position
0202 2. X motor initial
position after after initialization
position
initialization
photocoupler error.
1. X motor error,
X motor failed to
action is interfered.
leave home X motor failed to leave home
0203 2. X motor initial
position after position when initializing
position
initialization
photocoupler error.
1. X motor error,
Adjusting X motor X motor does not move to target action is interfered.
0204 to target position position after the adjusting command 2. X motor target
failed is executed. position
photocoupler error.
Adjusting X motor X motor does not back to home 1. X motor error,
0205
back to home position after the adjusting command action is interfered.

5-77
Hardware System

position failed is executed 2. X motor initial


position
photocoupler error.
1. X motor error,
Adjusting X motor X motor does not leave home action is interfered.
0206 to leave home position after the adjusting command 2. X motor initial
position failed is executed position
photocoupler error.
Re-send the X
X motor X motor adjustment is out of limit [1,
0207 motor adjusting
adjustment error 9]
command
X motor adjusting X motor adjusting steps at the target Adjust the X motor
0208
steps out of limit position are out of limit [-20, 20] again
The position in the X motor adjusting Re-send the X
X motor adjusting
0209 end command disagrees with the motor adjusting
end position error
pre-send adjusting position command
1. Y motor error,
Y motor failed to action is interfered.
Y motor does not move to the
0211 move to target 2. Y motor target
pre-set target position after action
position position
photocoupler error.
1. Y motor error,
Y motor failed to action is interfered.
Y motor is not at the upper position
0212 initialize to upper 2. Y motor upper
after initialization
position position
photocoupler error.
1. Y motor error,
Y motor failed to action is interfered.
Y motor does not move to lower
0213 initialize to lower 2. Y motor lower
position when initializing
position position
photocoupler error.
1. Y motor error,
Adjusting Y motor Y motor does not move to target action is interfered.
0214 to target position position after the adjusting command 2. Y motor target
failed is executed. position
photocoupler error.
1. Y motor error,
Adjusting Y motor Y motor does not back to upper
action is interfered.
0215 to upper position position after the adjusting command
2. Y motor upper
failed is executed
position

5-78
Hardware System

photocoupler error.
1. Y motor error,
Adjusting Y motor Y motor does not leave upper action is interfered.
0216 to leave upper position after the adjusting command 2. Y motor upper
position failed is executed position
photocoupler error.
Re-send the Y
Y motor Y motor adjustment is out of limit [1,
0217 motor adjusting
adjustment error 6]
command
Y motor adjusting Y motor adjusting steps at the target Adjust the Y motor
0218
steps out of limit position are out of limit [-63,63] again
The position in the Y motor adjusting Re-send the Y
Y motor adjusting
0219 end command disagrees with the motor adjusting
end position error
pre-send adjusting position command
Send the sample
Sample probe probe command
X motor or Y motor action is not
0220 assembly is after the sample
finished.
working probe action is
finished
Can not send the command to move
You can adjust the
the sample probe
Cannot adjust sample probe only
0221 upward/downward/leftward/rightward
sample probe after the adjusting
by one step before sending the
command is sent.
adjusting command.
X motor action The action time is longer than the
0222
overtime download time.
X motor is not at the photocoupler Move the Y motor to
X motor action
0223 position or Y motor is not at the upper photocoupler
forbidden
upper photocoupler position position
X motor does not
X motor current position does not
0224 match current Initialize the X motor
match the photocoupler position
position
Y motor action The action time is longer than the
0225
overtime download time.
Move the X motor to
X motor action X motor is not at the photocoupler
0226 the photocoupler
forbidden position
position
Y motor does not
Y motor current position does not
0227 match current Initialize the Y motor
match the photocoupler position
position

5-79
Hardware System

Y motor failed to
Y motor is not at the lower position
0228 pierce to lower Pierce again
after piercing
position
Y motor failed to
Y motor failed to back to upper
0229 pierce to upper Pierce again
position when piercing
position
X motor X motor photocoupler might be Replace X motor
0230
photocoupler error damaged photocoupler
Sample probe
RBC bath photocoupler might be Replace RBC bath
0231 RBC bath
damaged photocoupler
photocoupler error
Sample probe
WBC bath photocoupler might be Replace WBC bath
0232 WBC bath
damaged photocoupler
photocoupler error
Sample probe
DIFF bath photocoupler might be Replace DIFF bath
0233 DIFF bath
damaged photocoupler
photocoupler error
Y motor Y motor photocoupler might be Replace X motor
0234
photocoupler error damaged photocoupler
Sample probe
Upper photocoupler might be Replace the upper
0235 upper
damaged photocoupler
photocoupler error
Sample probe
Lower photocoupler might be Replace the lower
0236 lower
damaged photocoupler
photocoupler error
Sampling syringe does not finish the Command is sent
Sampling syringe previous action when it is requested early while the
0300
is working for initializing, resetting, aspirating or sampling syringe is
dispensing. still working.
1. Sampling syringe
photocoupler error
(if sampling syringe
Sampling syringe The detected photocoupler signals motor moves)
0301 photocoupler are without any change before and 2. Sampling syringe
abnormal after action. motor error (if
sampling syringe
motor dose not
move)
Sampling syringe After aspirating or dispensing, the 1. Sampling syringe
0302
aspirating or sampling syringe should be at the photocoupler error

5-80
Hardware System

dispensing action home position, but the position (if the sampling
failed 1 detected by the photocoupler syringe motor is at
disagrees the home position)
2. Sampling syringe
motor error (if the
sampling syringe
motor is not at the
home position)
1. Sampling syringe
photocoupler error
(if the sample
After aspirating or dispensing, the syringe motor is not
Sampling syringe
sampling syringe should not be at at the home
aspirating or
0303 the home position, but the position position)
dispensing action
detected by the photocoupler 2. Sampling syringe
failed 2
disagrees motor error (if the
sampling syringe
motor is at the
home position)
Before aspirating or dispensing, the Sampling syringe
Sampling syringe
sampling syringe should be at the photocoupler error
aspirating or
0304 home position, but the actual (if the sampling
dispensing action
position detected by the syringe motor is at
forbidden
photocoupler disagrees the home position)
Sampling syringe
Before aspirating or dispensing, the
Sampling syringe photocoupler error
sampling syringe should not be at
aspirating or (if the sampling
0305 the home position, but the actual
dispensing action syringe motor is not
position detected by the
forbidden 2 at the home
photocoupler disagrees
position)
Check and make
sure nothing is
wrong with the
sampling syringe
Sample syringe
Requested volume + aspirated aspirating and
0306 aspirate volume
volume > maximum aspirate volume dispensing action;
over range
then consider
programming
overflow at the
fluidics debugging

5-81
Hardware System

phase.
Check and make
sure nothing is
wrong with the
sampling syringe
aspirating and
Sample syringe dispensing action;
Requested volume > aspirated
0307 dispense volume then consider
volume
over range programming
overflow at the
fluidics debugging
phase and note the
volume add up
error.
Sampling syringe The action time is longer than the
0308
action overtime download time.
Command is sent
Sample injection syringe does not
early while the
Sample injection finish the previous action when it is
0310 sample injection
syringe is working requested for initializing, resetting,
syringe is still
aspirating or dispensing.
working.
1. Sample injection
syringe
photocoupler error
(if sample injection
Sample injection
The detected photocoupler signals syringe motor
syringe
0311 are without any change before and moves)
photocoupler
after action. 2. Sample injection
abnormal
syringe motor error
(if sample injection
syringe motor does
not move)
1. Sample injection
syringe
Sample injection After aspirating or dispensing, the photocoupler error
syringe aspirating syringe should be at the home (if sample injection
0312
or dispensing position, but the position detected by syringe is at the
action failed 1 the photocoupler disagrees home position)
2. Sample injection
syringe motor error

5-82
Hardware System

(if sample injection


syringe is not at the
home position)
1. Sample injection
syringe
photocoupler error
(if sample injection
Sample injection After aspirating or dispensing, the
syringe is not at the
syringe aspirating syringe should not be at the home
0313 home position)
or dispensing position, but the position detected by
2. Sample injection
action failed 2 the photocoupler disagrees
syringe motor error
(if sample injection
syringe is at the
home position)
Sample injection
Sample injection Before aspirating or dispensing, the syringe
syringe aspirating syringe should be at the home photocoupler error
0314
or dispensing position, but the position detected by (if sample injection
action forbidden 1 the photocoupler disagrees syringe is at the
home position)
Sample injection
Sample injection Before aspirating or dispensing, the syringe
syringe aspirating syringe should not be at the home photocoupler error
0315
or dispensing position, but the position detected by (if sample injection
action forbidden 2 the photocoupler disagrees syringe is not at the
home position)
Check and make
sure nothing is
wrong with the
sampling syringe
Sample injection aspirating and
Requested volume + aspirated
0316 syringe aspirate dispensing action;
volume > maximum aspirate volume
volume over range then consider
programming
overflow at the
fluidics debugging
phase.
Sample injection Check and make
Requested volume > aspirated
0317 syringe dispense sure nothing is
volume
volume over range wrong with the

5-83
Hardware System

sampling syringe
aspirating and
dispensing action;
then consider
programming
overflow at the
fluidics debugging
phase and note the
volume add up
error.
Sample injection
The action time is longer than the
0318 syringe action
download time.
overtime
Sheath fluid syringe does not finish Command is sent
sheath fluid the previous action when it is early while the
0320
syringe is working requested for initializing, resetting, sheath fluid syringe
aspirating or dispensing. is still working.
1. Sheath fluid
syringe
photocoupler error
(if sheath fluid
Sheath fluid
The detected photocoupler signals syringe motor
syringe
0321 are without any change before and moves)
photocoupler
after action. 2. Sheath fluid
abnormal
syringe motor error
(if sheath fluid
syringe motor dose
not move)
1. Sheath fluid
syringe
photocoupler error
(if sheath fluid
Sheath fluid After aspirating or dispensing, the syringe motor is at
syringe aspirating syringe should be at the home the home position)
0322
or dispensing position, but the position detected by 2. Sheath fluid
action failed 1 the photocoupler disagrees syringe motor error
(if sheath fluid
syringe motor is not
at the home
position)

5-84
Hardware System

1. Sheath fluid
syringe
photocoupler error
(if sheath fluid
Sheath fluid After aspirating or dispensing, the syringe motor is not
syringe aspirating syringe should not be at the home at the home
0323
or dispensing position, but the position detected by position)
action failed 2 the photocoupler disagrees 2. Sheath fluid
syringe motor error
(if sheath fluid
syringe motor is at
the home position)
Sheath fluid syringe
Sheath fluid Before aspirating or dispensing, the
photocoupler error
syringe aspirating syringe should be at the home
0324 (if sample syringe
or dispensing position, but the position detected by
motor is at the home
action forbidden 1 the photocoupler disagrees
position)
Sheath fluid syringe
Sheath fluid Before aspirating or dispensing, the
photocoupler error
syringe aspirating syringe should not be at the home
0325 (if sample syringe
or dispensing position, but the position detected by
motor is not at the
action forbidden 2 the photocoupler disagrees
home position)
Check and make
sure nothing is
wrong with the
sampling syringe
Sheath fluid aspirating and
Requested volume + aspirated
0326 syringe aspirate dispensing action;
volume > maximum aspirate volume
volume over range then consider
programming
overflow at the
fluidics debugging
phase.
Check and make
sure nothing is
Sheath fluid wrong with the
Requested volume > aspirated
0327 syringe dispense sampling syringe
volume
volume over range aspirating and
dispensing action;
then consider

5-85
Hardware System

programming
overflow at the
fluidics debugging
phase and note the
volume add up
error.
Sheath fluid
The action time is longer than the
0328 syringe action
download time.
overtime
Lyse syringe does not finish the Command is sent
Lyse syringe is previous action when it is requested early while the lyse
0330
working for initializing, resetting, aspirating or syringe is still
dispensing. working.
1. Lyse syringe
photocoupler error
(if the lyse syringe
Lyse syringe The detected photocoupler signals
motor moves)
0331 photocoupler are without any change before and
2. Lyse syringe
abnormal after action.
motor error (if the
lyse syringe motor
does not move)
1. Lyse syringe
photocoupler error
(if the lyse syringe
Lyse syringe After aspirating or dispensing, the motor is at the home
aspirating or syringe should be at the home position)
0332
dispensing action position, but the position detected by 2. Lyse syringe
failed 1 the photocoupler disagrees motor error (if the
lyse syringe motor
is not at the home
position)
1. Lyse syringe
photocoupler error
(if the lyse syringe
Lyse syringe After aspirating or dispensing, the
motor is not at the
aspirating or syringe should not be at the home
0333 home position)
dispensing action position, but the position detected by
2. Lyse syringe
failed 2 the photocoupler disagrees
motor error (if the
lyse syringe motor
is at the home

5-86
Hardware System

position)
Lyse syringe
Lyse syringe Before aspirating or dispensing, the
photocoupler error
aspirating or syringe should be at the home
0334 (if the lyse syringe
dispensing action position, but the position detected by
motor is at the home
forbidden 1 the photocoupler disagrees
position)
Lyse syringe
Lyse syringe Before aspirating or dispensing, the
photocoupler error
aspirating or syringe should not be at the home
0335 (if the lyse syringe
dispensing action position, but the position detected by
motor is not at the
forbidden 2 the photocoupler disagrees
home position)
Check and make
sure nothing is
wrong with the
sampling syringe
Lyse syringe aspirating and
Requested volume + aspirated
0336 aspirate volume dispensing action;
volume > maximum aspirate volume
over range then consider
programming
overflow at the
fluidics debugging
phase.
Check and make
sure nothing is
wrong with the
sampling syringe
aspirating and
Lyse syringe dispensing action;
Requested volume > aspirated
0337 dispense volume then consider
volume
over range programming
overflow at the
fluidics debugging
phase and note the
volume add up
error.
Lyse syringe The action time is longer than the
0338
action overtime download time.
Diluent syringe does not finish the Command is sent
Diluent syringe is
0340 previous action when it is requested early while the
working
for initializing, resetting, aspirating or diluent syringe is

5-87
Hardware System

dispensing. still working.


1. Diluent syringe
photocoupler error
(if the diluent
syringe motor
Diluent syringe The detected photocoupler signals
moves)
0341 photocoupler are without any change before and
2. Diluent syringe
abnormal after action.
motor error (if the
diluent syringe
motor dose not
move)
1. Diluent syringe
photocoupler error
(if the diluent
Diluent syringe After aspirating or dispensing, the syringe motor is at
aspirating or syringe should be at the home the home position)
0342
dispensing action position, but the position detected by 2. Diluent syringe
failed 1 the photocoupler disagrees motor error (if the
diluent syringe
motor is not at the
home position)
1. Diluent syringe
photocoupler error
(if the diluent
syringe motor is not
Diluent syringe After aspirating or dispensing, the
at the home
aspirating or syringe should not be at the home
0343 position)
dispensing action position, but the position detected by
2. Diluent syringe
failed 2 the photocoupler disagrees
motor error (if the
diluent syringe
motor is at the home
position)
Diluent syringe
Diluent syringe Before aspirating or dispensing, the
photocoupler error
aspirating or syringe should be at the home
0344 (if the diluent
dispensing action position, but the position detected by
syringe motor is at
forbidden 1 the photocoupler disagrees
the home position)
Diluent syringe Before aspirating or dispensing, the Diluent syringe
0345 aspirating or syringe should not be at the home photocoupler error
dispensing action position, but the position detected by (if the diluent

5-88
Hardware System

forbidden 2 the photocoupler disagrees syringe motor is not


at the home
position)
Check and make
sure nothing is
wrong with the
sampling syringe
Diluent syringe aspirating and
Requested volume + aspirated
0346 aspirate volume dispensing action;
volume > maximum aspirate volume
over range then consider
programming
overflow at the
fluidics debugging
phase.
Check and make
sure nothing is
wrong with the
sampling syringe
aspirating and
Diluent syringe dispensing action;
Requested volume > aspirated
0347 dispense volume then consider
volume
over range programming
overflow at the
fluidics debugging
phase and note the
volume add up
error.
Diluent syringe The action time is longer than the
0348
action overtime download time.
First start the
Automatic testing Start testing the motors before the
automatic testing
0390 command automatic testing command is
command, and then
forbidden received.
test the motors.
Optical system The optical system temp. setup is
Re-set the optical
0401 temp. setup out of out of the MCU pre-set range
system temperature
limit [30,50]
Reaction bath The reaction bath temp. setup is out
Re-set the reaction
0402 temp. setup out of of the MCU pre-set range
bath temperature
limit [30,50]
0403 Optical system Optical system temperature is out of 1. Check whether

5-89
Hardware System

temp. error the set range the heater of the


optical system is
well connected.
2. Check whether
the temperature
collection channel
of the optical
system is normal.
1. Check whether
the heater of the
reaction bath is well
connected.
Reaction bath Reaction bath temperature is out of
0404 2. Check whether
temp. error the set range
the temperature
collection channel
of the reaction bath
is normal.
1. The actual
ambient
temperature is out
of the working
Ambient temp. Ambient temperature is out of the set range.
0501
abnormal range 2. Check whether
the temperature
transducer and the
measurement circuit
work normally.
1. Check whether
the pneumatic
connection is well
connected and
whether the
Controlling The pressure in the chamber can not pressure pump
0601 pressure chamber reach the target range within the works normally.
pressure failed specified fluidics time. 2. Check whether
the pressure sensor
works normally and
whether the
pressure detection
signals of the MCU

5-90
Hardware System

are normal.
1. Check whether
the pneumatic
connection is well
connected and
whether the vacuum
pump and valve 30
Controlling The vacuum in the chamber can not and 31 works
0602 vacuum chamber reach the target range within the normally.
vacuum failed specified fluidics time. 2. Check whether
the pressure sensor
works normally and
whether the
pressure detection
signals of the MCU
are normal.
Wait and then send
the adjusting
Adjusting The pressure in the chamber is
command again
0603 pressure chamber being controlled. Can not send the
after the previous
pressure failed adjusting command
pressure controlling
is done.
Wait and then send
the adjusting
Adjusting vacuum The vacuum in the chamber is being
command again
0604 chamber vacuum controlled. Can not send the
after the previous
failed adjusting command
vacuum controlling
is done.
1. Check whether
the pneumatic
connection is well
connected and
whether the
Pressure chamber
The pressure in the chamber is out pressure pump
0605 pressure out of
of the set range works normally.
limit
2. Check whether
the pressure sensor
works normally and
whether the
pressure detection

5-91
Hardware System

signals of the MCU


are normal.
1. Check whether
the pneumatic
connection is well
connected and
whether the vacuum
pump and valve 30
Vacuum chamber and 31 works
The vacuum in the chamber is out of
0606 vacuum out of normally.
the set range
limit 2. Check whether
the pressure sensor
works normally and
whether the
pressure detection
signals of the MCU
are normal.
Pressure chamber Re-send the control
The pressure control of the pressure
0607 pressure control command of
chamber is of negative range.
range error positive range
Vacuum chamber Re-send the control
The vacuum control of the vacuum
0608 vacuum control command of
chamber is of positive range
range error negative range
FPGA download Wrong download mark. It is not ':'
0701 Re-download
mark error start
FPGA download The download command is not
0702 Re-download
command error defined.
Read all
0703 configuration chip Finish reading data
content finished
Data write out of The data written for a single time
0704 Re-download
limit exceeds the maximum of 32 digits
Data write and The data written plus the
0705 head-address head-address exceed the maximum Re-download
over range content of one page (256 bytes).
Send the enabling
0706 Write forbidden Failed to write the configuration chip
command first
0707 Write overtime Write delay exceeds 10ms Re-download
Write-in EEPROM 1. Check the
0731 Failed to write data into EEPROM
error EEPROM circuit for

5-92
Hardware System

any
missing-soldered
component; check
the EEPROM pin for
short circuit and
missolder, etc.
2. If short circuit is
not found and all
components are
properly soldered, it
indicates the
EEPROM is
damaged.
Functional code in Communication
The functional code is not defined in
0801 the control code abnormal. Please
the communication rules.
error try again.
The data length mismatches the Communication
0802 Data length error corresponding data length of the abnormal. Please
current command label try again.
Communication
Command label The command label is not defined in
0803 abnormal. Please
error the communication rules.
try again.
Communication
The check code mismatches the
0804 Check code error abnormal. Please
calculated one
try again.
Communication
The end code is not the one defined
0805 End code error abnormal. Please
in the communication rules. (016)
try again.
Identity code in Communication
The identity code is not defined in
0806 the control code abnormal. Please
the communication rules.
error try again.
Wait for the
Can not continue analyzing the next
Sequence pack previous sequence
0807 sequence pack if a sequence pack is
analyzing pack finish
being analyzed
analyzing
The drive board starts analysis
No complete command before a complete Re-send a complete
0808
sequence pack sequence pack (consists of pack sequence pack
head, body and end) is received.
0809 Sequence pack The pack head command is sent Re-send a complete

5-93
Hardware System

head frame error when the previous sequence pack sequence pack
has not been sent completely.
Check the
sequence pack No.
The sequence pack No. in the start
Sequence pack in the start
0810 command is different with the
start No. error command and
sequence pack No. to be analyzed.
re-send the start
command
Check the number
The number of frames in the pack of frames in the
Sequence pack
0811 end command is different with the pack end command
total frames error
previously saved fames. and re-send the
sequence pack
Re-send the
Write-in sequence sequence pack
Insufficient room in the MCU for
0812 pack buffer zone when there is
storing sequence pack
failed sufficient room in
the MCU
Sequence pack The sequence pack end frame is Re-send a complete
0813
end frame error sent without sending the head frame. sequence pack
Sequence pack The sequence pack body frame is Re-send a complete
0814
body frame error sent without sending the head frame. sequence pack
The commands in the sent sequence
Sequence pack Re-send a complete
0815 pack are not arranged in the order of
frame order error sequence pack
start time.
Check the max
Sequence pack
The sequence pack execution time execution time and
0816 execution
exceeds the pre-set time. re-send the
overtime
sequence pack
None-sequence The none-sequence pack command
Re-send a complete
0817 pack analysis is added into the sequence pack
sequence pack
error commands.

Troubleshooting special errors

1. Troubleshooting the abnormal pneumatic pressure


If a certain pressure value is abnormal, check the related pumps, valves and airway
for leakage.
If the pneumatic system is normal, then the error should be caused by the damaged
pressure sensor on the drive board. Please replace the sensor or the drive board.

5-94
Hardware System

The pressure signals are outputted by the volumetric board. See the following table
for the voltage and pressure.

Table 5-67 Voltage signals and the corresponding pressures

Pressure Pressure Test Relation between sensor


Note
channel range point output voltage and pressure
Pressure P represents
2.54kPa TP30
chamber pressure, and
its unit is kPa.
P Vout 1.25 250 Vout represents
Vacuum -8
TP31 the voltage of
chamber -40kPa
the test point,
and its unit is V

2. Troubleshooting the abnormal mechanism action


To observe and troubleshoot the abnormal mechanism actions, the service engineers are
usually needed. When errors of this kind happen, please be sure to troubleshoot them as per
the above-mentioned recommended action and the following procedures.
Check whether the error-related mechanisms (such as motors) can move. If the
mechanisms do not move, then the error should be caused by the abnormal executive
components, such as disconnected or damaged motor. If nothing is wrong with them, then
the error should be caused by the damaged drive board, so the driver board should be
replaced.
If the mechanisms can move, check whether they move in position and whether they are
jammed by lines or other mechanisms during the movement. For transmissive
photocoupler, if the baffle enters above 2/3 photocoupler, it is baffled and moves is in
position.
If nothing is wrong with the mechanism action, consider the photocoupler error. Replace
the photocoupler.
If errors still remain after the photocoupler is replaced, then it should be caused by the
error components on the driver board. Replace the driver board.

5.4 Power board

5.4.1 Introduction
The power board provides six stable power supplies, including
D5V,A+12V,A-12V,AC130V,P12V and P24V.

5-95
Hardware System

5.4.2 Board Composition

Function

The power board provides the following six stable power supplies for each functional board
and module of the BC-5300: D5V,A+12V,A-12V,AC130V,P12V and P24V.

Block diagram

Figure 5-18 Block diagram of the power board

Description

The power board works with the 90V-264V AC input voltage (50-60Hz).
Once the AC power switch is turned on, all the circuits work and the
D5V,A+12V,A-12V,AC130V,P12V and P24V voltage are outputted.
Circuit loads of the power board are described in the table below:

5-96
Hardware System

Table 5-68 Output voltage features


Voltage Minimum Nominal Output voltage Voltage Load Noise
current current range adjustment adjustment
rate rate
D5V 2A 5A 4.85/5.25V 1 5% 100mV
+A12V 0mA 1A 11. 5/12. 5V 1 5% 100mV
-A12V 0mA 650mA -11.5/-12.5V 1 5% 100mV
P12V 0.3A 5.5A 11.5/12.5V 1 5% 150mV
P24V 0A 4A 22/27V 1 10% 150mV
AC120V 0mA 60mA 115/145V(RMS) 1 10% /

For the P24V, the 7.8A maximum current with the approximate lasting time of 2S and the
period of 60S may occur when working.

Interface definition

The power board is configured with 7 external interfaces. The J1 and J2 interfaces are
connectors of the socket; the rest of the interfaces are connectors of the plug terminal leading
from the board edges. The No. of the PCB board is TP1-TP20.The location of the interfaces on
the power board is shown below.

5-97
Hardware System

Figure 5-19 Interface layout of the power board


See the following table for the function of each interface.

Table 5-69 Interfaces on the power board


Interface Function Number of pins Number of lands Note
J1 AC input 3 / /
Power supply output
J2 of the fans 6 / /
PCB
Power supply output soldering
A-J12 of the analog part 6 4 output
PCB
soldering
A-J13 AC output 3 2 output
A-J35 Power supply output 10 10 PCB

5-98
Hardware System

of the power part soldering


output
PCB
Power supply output soldering
A-J37 of the digital part 4 4 output

Definition of J1:

Table 5-70 Definition of AC input interface


Pin Definition
1 L,Live wire
2 PG,Earth wire
3 N,Neutral wire

Definition of J2:

Table 5-71 Definition of the fan interface


Pin Definition
P12V,connects the positive end of the P12V output
1/3/5 voltage
PGND,connects the negative end of the P12V
2/4/6 output voltage

Definition of AJ12:

Table 5-72 Definition of analog board output


Land Definition Pin
AGND,connects the reference
ground of the analog board output
TP16AGND\TP17AGND voltage 6,7
+A12V,connects the positive end of 5
TP15A12V the +A12V output voltage
-A12V,connects the negative end of 8
TP18A-12V the -A12V output voltage
/ NC 1/2/3/4

Definition of AJ13:

Table 5-73 Definition of AC output


Land Definition Pin
TP19\TP20 Two output ends of 1/3

5-99
Hardware System

AC120
/ NC 2

Definition of AJ35:

Table 5-74 Definition of power supply output


Land Definition Pin
positive end of the P12V
TP1P12V/TP2P12V 4/5
output voltage
TP12PGND/TP13PGND/TP3P negative end of the P12V
6/7/8/9/10
GND\TP4PGND\TP14PGND output voltage
TP9P24V\TP10P24V\TP11P24 Positive end of the P24V
1/2/3
V output voltage

Definition of AJ37:

Table 5-75 Definition of D5V output


Land Definition Pin
Positive end of the 5V output
TP5D5V/TP6D5V
voltage 1/2
DGND, negative end of the 3/4
TP7DGND/TP8DGND
5V output voltage

5-100
Hardware System

Assembly drawing

Figure 5-20 Assembly drawing of the power board

5.4.3 Adjustment and Test Points


The important test points when maintaining the power board are listed below:

5-101
Hardware System

Table 5-76 Test points on the power board


No. Pin Function Reference
value
1 Q101.2 Q101 switching waveform /
2 Q101.1 Q101 drive waveform /
3 C114.+ PFC output voltage 39020V
4 U101.9 Reference output voltage of the chip 7.5V
5 U101.14 U101 oscillating waveform /
6 C206.+ VCC voltage 17V~22.5V
7 C204 VDD voltage 121V
8 C223 supply voltage of U201 121V
9 Q201.1 Q201 drive waveform /
10 Q201.2 Q201 switching waveform /
11 U201.8 U201 reference voltage 5V
12 U201.4 U201 oscillating waveform /
13 Q201.3 R235 voltage waveform, Q201 current /
waveform
14 C232.+ D5V output voltage and ripple voltage 50.5V
15 C311.+ U301 supply voltage 121V
16 U301.4 U301 oscillating waveform /
17 U301.8 U301 reference voltage 8V
18 Q303.1 Q303 drive waveform /
19 Q303.2 Q303 switching waveform /
20 Q303.3 Q303 current waveform, R313 voltage /
waveform
21 C326.+ 12VB voltage 120.5V
22 C328.+ 130V DC output 115V150V
23 C332.+ A+12V output 120.5V
24 C338.- A-12V output -120.5V
25 U351.15 U351 supply voltage 120.5V
26 U351.5 U351 oscillating waveform /
27 U351.11 Q351 drive waveform /
28 U351.14 Q351 drive waveform /
29 U351.16 U351 reference voltage 5V
30 Q361.1 Q361 drive waveform /
31 Q362.1 Q362 drive waveform /
32 Q363.1 Q363 drive waveform /
33 Q364.1 Q364 drive waveform /
34 C409. U401 supply voltage 121V

5-102
Hardware System

35 U401.5 U401 oscillating waveform /


36 U401.14 U401 reference voltage 5V
37 U401.9 Q401 drive waveform /
38 Q406.1 Q406 drive waveform /
39 Q406.2 Q406 switching waveform /
40 C423.+ P24V output voltage, ripple 22~27V
41 C442.+ P12V output voltage, ripple 120.5V

5.4.4 Replacement and Connection

Purpose

Damaged power assembly or power board needs to be replaced by a new one.

Tools

107 cross-headed screwdriver


Sharp-nose pliers
Multimeter

Disassembly

Disassembly of the power board consists of the following two main procedures (removing the
whole power assembly and further disassembly of the inner components):

Remove the whole power assembly from the main unit:


1. Shutdown the analyzer and cut off the power supply;
2. Open the left door;
3. Remove the data boardsee section 5.2.4 for details

4. Remove the drive boardsee section 5.3.4 for details

5. Unplug the 3 cables connecting the power assembly from the mother board; loose the
cable fixer and remove the cables.
6. Use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove the cross-headed panhead screws
(M4X8) fixing the earth wire from the ground pole.
7. Use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove the 6 cross-headed panhead screws
(M4X8) fixing the power assembly.
8. Draw out the power assembly for 50-100mm and unplug the 2 cable connectors
connecting the power switch.
9. Draw out and remove the power assembly.

5-103
Hardware System

Figure 5-21 Removing the power assembly 1


1 ---Mother board 2 --- Power switch
3 --- Power assembly 4 ---Panhead screw M4X8
5 ---Ground pole

Further disassembly of the power assembly


1. Use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove the 2 cross-headed panhead screws
(M4X8) fixing the power cover, and then remove the cover together with the power socket
from the power assembly.
2. Use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove the 2 cross-headed panhead screws
(M3X8) fixing the power socket, and then disassembly the power socket.
3. Use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove the 4 cross-headed panhead screws
(M3X8) fixing the shielding box, and then remove the shielding cover.
4. Use the shape-nose pliers to loose the 6 M3 nuts fixing the fan and unplug the cable plug
from the power board, and then remove the fan.
5. Use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove the 9 cross-headed panhead screws
(M3X6) from the power board, and then remove the power board.

5-104
Hardware System

Figure 5-22 removing the power assembly 2


1---Panhead screw M3X8 2 --- Power socket
3---Panhead screw M4X8 4 ---Fan
5---M3 Nut 6---Power board
7 ---fixing board for power board 8---Cross-recessed panhead screw M3x6
9---Power board shielding cover 10 ---Power cover

Assembly

Assemble the power board as per the above-mentioned steps in the reverse order.

Wear antistatic gloves before maintaining or removing the board.

Be sure to shut down the analyzer and cut off the power supply before
disassembling/assembling the board.

Verification

2. Check and make sure the earth wire of the AC input socket is properly connected to the
conductive cover of the main unit.
3. Connect the power cord and turn on the AC switch, then the fan works.

5-105
Hardware System

When assembling, before fixing the upper cover of the power assembly, be
sure the AC plug and the plug of the fan are connected with the power
board.

Be sure the screws are tightened to firmly fix the power assembly with the
main unit.

5.4.5 Troubleshooting

Causes and recommended action

Refer to the flow chart below to troubleshoot the power board.

5-106
Hardware System

Figure 5-23 Power board troubleshooting flow chart

Be sure the screws are tightened to firmly fix the power assembly with the main unit.

5-107
Hardware System

5.5 Volumetric and pressure detecting board


5.5.1 Introduction
The volumetric board provides the metric time signals for the RBC/PLT and WBC count.
Principles for the volumetric time signals: the detected volumetric start and end signals are
processed by the volumetric sensor, through current-voltage transferring, level-transforming
and de-bouncing, the drive-board-required TTL level is obtained and outputted. Principles for
the vacuum and pressure detecting: the detected vacuum and pressure signals are transferred
to the current signals by the vacuum and pressure sensor, and then through the signal
transferring, the AD-required the voltage signals are outputted to the drive board.

5.5.2 Board Composition


Function

Provides the time signals of RBC/PLT and WBC count, i.e. the start and end time of
running.
Provides the vacuum and pressure intensity signals of the vacuum chamber and pressure
chamber, sends the signals to the drive board.

Block diagram

Figure 5-24 Block diagram of the volumetric and pressure detecting board

5-108
Hardware System

Description

WBC count start/end signals


The WBC count start/end signals detected by the WBC volumetric sensor are I-V transferred,
level-transformed and de-bounced by the volumetric board, and then sent to the drive board.

RBC/PLT count start/end signals


The RBC/PLT count start/end signals detected by the RBC/PLT volumetric sensor are I-V
transferred, level-transformed and de-bounced by the volumetric board, and then sent to the
drive board.

Drive control the volumetric sensor


The working status of the volumetric sensor is controlled by the drive board through J1
connector. When the level of the control signal is high, the volumetric sensor doesn't work;
when the level is low, the volumetric sensor works.

Vacuum/pressure voltage signals


The vacuum/pressure intensity signals of the vacuum/pressure chamber are transferred to the
voltage signals by the vacuum/pressure sensor on the volumetric board. Then, they are further
transferred to the A/D-required voltage signals and then sent to the drive board through the J1
connector.

Interface definition

The volumetric board has only one 12PIN connector connecting the drive board. The location
of the connector is shown below.

5-109
Hardware System

Figure 5-25 Interface layout of the volumetric board

Table 5-77 Pin definition


No. Pin Signal description Signal Type
1 P+12V +12V power sullpy +12 power supply
2 PGND Power ground /
3 DGND Digital ground /
4 POSI_PRESS Pressure voltage signals output Analog
5 NEGA_PRESS Vacuum voltage signals output Analog
6 DGND Digital ground /
7 #VM_CTRL Volumetric sensor control signals TTL level
8 RBC_START RBC count start signals TTL level
9 RBC_STOP RBC count stop signals TTL level
10 WBC_START WBC count start signals TTL level
11 WBC_STOP WBC count stop signals TTL level
12 D+5V Digital +5V power supply +5V power supply

5-110
Hardware System

Assembly drawing

Figure 5-26 Assembly drawing of the volumetric board-Top

Figure 5-27 Assembly drawing of the volumetric board-Bottom

5.5.3 Disassembly and assembly method


Purpose

The volumetric board is the front component of the whole device. Damaged volumetric board
needs to be replaced by a new one. Please follow the procedures to have the volumetric board
replaced.

5-111
Hardware System

Tools

107 cross-headed screwdriver


107 flat-headed screwdriver
Sharp-nosed pliers
Disassembly

4. Shut down the analyzer;


5. Open the right door;
6. Use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove the 2 cross-headed panhead screws
(M3X8) fixing the shielding box, and then remove the shielding cover.
7. Disconnect the 4 pipes connecting the volumetric tube.
8. Use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove the 2 cross-headed panhead screws
(M3X8), and use the sharp-nosed pliers to remove the 2 socket cap screws (M3X16) fixing
the volumetric board.
9. Pull out the volumetric board for 30-50mm; unplug the cable connectors on its back and
disconnect the 2 pipes, and then remove the board.

Figure 5-28 Disassembly of the volumetric board


1---volumetric tube bracket 2---Panhead screw M3X8
3---Volumetric tube 4---Rubber ring
5---Socket cap screws (M3X16) 6---Shielding box of volumetric board
7---Volumetric board

5-112
Hardware System

Assembly

Assemble the power board as per the above-mentioned steps in the reverse order.

Verification

1. The volumetric board is assembled properly.


2. Start up the analyzer properly.
3. Running samples in the whole blood mode. If the RBC/WBC clogging, bubbles and
abnormal pressure/vacuum are not reported by the analyzer, the replacement is
succeeded. If one or more above-mentioned error(s) is reported, you should remove the
error accordingly.

5.5.4 Troubleshooting

Table 5-78 Troubleshooting the volumetric board

Error Recommended
No. Error name Error feature Causes Probability
type action
Improper cable
connection with Reconnect the
the mother board cable or
Medium
or disconnection change a new
The voltage of caused by a cable
the P+12V test broken cable
+12V power System
1 point is not Improper power
supply error error
equal to supply of the See
12V0.6V. main unit or troubleshooting
Improper +12V Low of the drive
power supply board and
sent by the power board
mother board
L2 is damaged
The voltage of
(or rosin jointed)
the P+5V test Replace or
+5V power Board or something is
2 point is not Low re-solder the
supply error error wrong (rosin
equal to components
jointed) with the
5V0.25V.
C20 and C13.

5-113
Hardware System

Improper cable
connection with Reconnect the
the mother board cable or
Medium
or disconnection change a new
caused by a cable
broken cable
Something is
wrong with the See No.2 in the
Low
+5V power table
Comparator The TP6
Board supply.
3 reference power output voltage
error Something is
supply wrong 2.5V0.25V Replace or
wrong with the
Low re-solder the
U8 chip or it is
U8
rosin jointed.
Improper cable
connection with Reconnect the
the mother board cable or
Medium
or disconnection change a new
Voltage of the caused by a cable
Control signal System
4 VM_CTRL broken cable
error error
signal 0.8V Control signals
See
sent by the drive
troubleshooting
board through Low
of the drive
the mother board
board
is wrong
Control signal See No.4 in the
Medium
error table
Control circuit
Constant current error (Q1 or U2 is
Standard
source of the Board wrong or rosin
5 voltage (TP5) Replace or
volumetric error jointed; resistors
2.5V0.25V Medium re-solder the
sensor error R10, R11, R18,
components
R23, R25 and
R24 is wrong or
rosin jointed)

5-114
Hardware System

Adjust VWST,
VWSP, VRST
and VRSP to
VWST, VWSP, make the
VRST or VRSP voltage of the
Medium
are not adjusted point WT, WP,
well. RT and RP
equals to
2.7V0.1V
Voltage of the Voltage of the
respectively.
point WT, WP, RT Board point WT, WP,
6 Volumetric
and RP is not the error RT and RP
sensor U15, U21, Replace or
expected value 2.7V0.1V
U16 or U17 is Low re-solder the
wrong (or rosin components
jointed).
Constant current
source of the See No.5 in the
Medium
volumetric table
sensor error
+5V power See No.2 in the
Low
supply error table
D1, D2, D3 or D4 Re-solder or
is damaged (or Low change the
rosin jointed) component
Indicators D1,
+5V power See No.2 in the
D2, D3 and D4 Low
supply error table
are off when
Something is
fluid flows or
Indicator Board wrong with the See No.3 in the
7 are still on Low
abnormal error TP6 standard table
when no fluid
power supply
flows through
the volumetric Voltage of the
tube point WT, WP, RT See No.6 in the
Medium
and RP table
2.7V0.1V

Constant current Board Standard +12V power See No.1 in the


8 Low
source error of error voltage TP10 supply error table

5-115
Hardware System

the vacuum 2.5V0.25V C14, R37, U11, Re-solder or


sensor R47 or U4 is change the
Medium
damaged (or component
rosin jointed).
+12V power See No.1 in the
Low
Constant current supply error table
Standard
source error of Board C21, R36, R35, Re-solder or
9 voltage TP7
the pressure error U3 or U10 is change the
2.5V0.25V Medium
sensor damaged (or component
rosin jointed).
+12V power See No.1 in the
Low
Pressure/vacuum supply error table
Standard
unit +2.5V Board R39, C11, R38,
10 voltage TP9 Re-solder or
reference power error R48, VR9, U9 or
2.5V0.25V Medium change the
supply error U6 is damaged
component
(or rosin jointed)

Adjust VR9,
making the
VR9 is not
Medium relative voltage
adjusted well.
of the TP9 to
The relative TP8
Pressure/vacuum
Board voltage of the 1.2500.002V
11 1.25V voltage
error TP9 to the TP8 Pressure/vacuum
error
1.2500.002V 2.5V reference See No.10 in
Medium
power supply the table
error
Replace or
U6 is damaged
Medium re-solder the
or rosin jointed
components
Pressure output Board When the input +12V power See No.1 in the
12 Low
voltage abnormal error pressure is supply error table
0HPa or Constant current
450HPa, the source error of See No.9 in the
Medium
output voltage the pressure table
of the point PP sensor
is not equal to 1.25V voltage See No.11 in
Medium
1.2500.002V error the table

5-116
Hardware System

or Adjust PPZ to
2.2500.002V. make the
voltage of the
PP is
1.2500.002V
when the input
pressure is 0.
PPZ or PPG is
Medium Then, adjust
not adjusted well
PPG to make
the voltage of
the PP is
1.2500.002V
when the input
pressure is
450HPa.
U12, U14, R34,
R44, R45, R46, Re-solder or
R50, R52, C10 or Medium change the
C23 is damaged component
(or rosin jointed)
Vacuum output Board When the input +12V power See No.1 in the
13 Low
voltage abnormal error pressure is supply error table
0HPa or Constant current
-450HPa, the source error of See No.8 in the
Medium
output voltage the vacuum table
of the point NP sensor
is not equal to 1.25V voltage See No.11 in
Medium
1.2500.002V error the table

5-117
Hardware System

or Adjust NPZ to
0.2500.002V. make the
voltage of the
NP is
1.2500.002V
when the input
pressure is 0.
NPZ or NPG is
Medium Then, adjust
not adjusted well
NPG to make
the voltage of
the NP is
0.2500.002V
when the input
pressure is
-450HPa.
U12, U13, R33,
R40, R41, R42, Re-solder or
R43, R51, C7 or Medium change the
C22 is damaged component
(or rosin jointed)

5-118
Hardware System

5.6 Liquid-level detecting board

5.6.1 Introduction
The liquid level board detects the status (sufficient or insufficient) of the LEO(I),LEO(II), LH and
cleanser and sends the detected results to the drive board. Principles for the liquid level
detecting: the sufficient or insufficient signals detected by the liquid sensor are processed by
current-voltage transferring, level-transforming and de-bouncing. Finally, the
drive-board-required TTL level is obtained and outputted.

5.6.2 Board composition


Function

The liquid level board detects the status (sufficient or insufficient) of the LEO(I),LEO(II), LH and
cleanser, transfers the signals and sends them to the drive board.

Block diagram

Figure 5-29 Block diagram of the liquid-level detecting board

Description

For the liquid level of the LEO(I), LEO(II), LH and cleanser are detected by the same principle,
so the liquid level detection of LEO(I) is used just to be the example.

5-119
Hardware System

Detecting the status (sufficient/insufficient) of LEO(I)


The status (sufficient/insufficient) signals of the LEO(I) detected by the sensor is conducted the
I-V converting, level-transforming and de-bouncing by the liquid-level detecting board and then
sent to the drive board.

Drive control of the detecting sensors of the four reagents


The working status of the detecting sensors is controlled by the drive board through J1
connector. When the level of the control signal is high, the detecting sensors do not work;
when the level is low, the detecting sensors work.

Interface definition

The liquid level detecting board has only one connector of 8PIN connecting the drive board.
The location of the connector is shown below.

Figure 5-30 Interface definition of the liquid-level detecting board

The definition of pins is shown in the table below.

Table 5-79 Pin definition of the liquid-level detecting board

5-120
Hardware System

No. Pin Signal description Signal Type


1 D+5V Digital +5V power +5V power supply
supply
2 LIQ1 LEO(I) status output TTL level
signals
3 LIQ2 LEO(II) status output TTL level
signals
4 LIQ3 LH status output TTL level
signals
5 LIQ4 Cleanser status TTL level
output signals
6 / / /
7 #D_CTRL Drive control signals TTL level
of detecting sensor
8 DGND Digital ground /

Assembly drawing

Figure 5-31 Assembly drawing of the liquid-level detecting board-Top

Figure 5-32 Assembly drawing of the liquid-level detecting board-Bottom

5-121
Hardware System

5.6.3 Replacement and Connection

Purpose

Damaged liquid-level detecting board needs to be replaced by a new one to ensure the
operation of the analyzer. Please follow the procedures to have the board replaced.

Tools

107 cross-headed screwdriver


107 flat-headed screwdriver

Disassembly

Liquid-level detecting board disassembly consists of the following two main procedures:
Remove the board from the main unit:
1. Shut down the analyzer.
2. Open the left door.
3. Use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove the 2 cross-headed panhead screws
(M4X8) fixing the shielding box, and then remove the shielding cover.
4. Pull the 4 pipes out from the pipe clamp of the liquid-level detecting board.
5. Use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove the 4 cross-headed panhead screws
(M3X6) from the liquid-level detecting board.
6. Pull out the liquid-level detecting board for 30-50mm, unplug the cable connectors on its
back, and then remove the board.

5-122
Hardware System

Figure 5-33 Disassemble the liquid-level detecting board-1


1---Cross-recessed panhead screw 2---Liquid-level detecting board shielding
M3x6 (with washer) cover
3---Panhead screw M3X8 4---Liquid-level detecting board

Further disassembly of the drive board


1. Use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove the 4 cross-headed panhead screws
M3X8 fixing the pipe clamp.
2. Remove the 2 pipe clamps.

Figure 5-34 Disassemble the liquid-level detecting board-2


1---Cross-recessed panhead screw M3X8 2---Liquid-level detecting board
3---Pipe clamp

5-123
Hardware System

Assembly

Assemble the power board as per the above-mentioned steps in the reverse order.

Verification

1. The liquid-level detecting board is assembled properly.


2. The tubing is connected properly.
3. Start up the analyzer properly.Running samples in the whole blood mode. If No LEO(I)
(/LEO(II)/LH /cleanser) or bubbles are not reported by the analyzer, the replacement is
succeeded. If one or more above-mentioned error(s) is reported, you should remove the
error accordingly.

5.6.4 Troubleshooting

Table 5-80 Troubleshooting the liquid-level detecting board

Error Error Recommended


No. Error name Causes Probability
type features action
Improper cable
connection with
Reconnect the
the mother board
Medium cable or change a
or disconnection
new cable
caused by a
broken cable
Improper power
The voltage
supply of the main See
of the +5V
+5V power System unit or Improper troubleshooting of
1 test point is Low
supply error error +5V power supply the drive board
not equal to
sent by the and power board
5V0.25V.
mother board
L2 is damaged (or
rosin jointed) or
Replace or
something is
Low re-solder the
wrong (rosin
components
jointed) with the
C7 and C11.
Comparator The TP1 Something is
Board See No.1 in the
2 reference output wrong with the Low
error table
power voltage +5V power supply.

5-124
Hardware System

supply 2.5V0.25V Something is


wrong wrong with the
Replace or
chip U9 or R10 or Low
re-solder the U9
they are rosin
jointed.
Improper cable
connection with
Reconnect the
the mother board
Medium cable or change a
Voltage of or disconnection
new cable
the caused by a
Control System
3 D_CTRL broken cable
signal error error
signal Control signals
0.8V sent by the drive See
board through the Low troubleshooting of
mother board is the drive board
wrong
Control signal See No.3 in the
Medium
error table
Voltage to Control circuit
Abnormal ground of error (Q1, U1, U2,
driving of collector U3 or U4 are
Board
4 the electrode of wrong or rosin Replace or
error
detecting Q1 is not jointed; resistors Medium re-solder the
sensor between R1, R2, R9, R40, components
4.4V-5.25V. R41, R42 or R43
are wrong or rosin
jointed).
The voltage Adjust VL1, VL2,
of point voltage of VL3 and VL4 to
VLL1, point VLL1, make the voltage
VLL1, VVL2,
VVL2, Board VVL2, of the point VVL1,
5 VVL3 or VVL4 are Medium
VVL3 and error VVL3 and VVL2, VVL3 and
not adjusted well.
VVL4 is not VVL4 VVL4 equals to
the 2.2V0.1V 2.2V0.1V
expected respectively.
value. Detecting sensors
Replace or
U1, U2, U3 or U4
Low re-solder the
are wrong (or
components
rosin jointed).

5-125
Hardware System

Abnormal driving
See No.4 in the
of the detecting Medium
table
sensor
+5V power supply See No.2 in the
Low
error table
LED1, LED2,
Re-solder or
LED3 or LED4 are
Low change the
damaged (or rosin
component
jointed)
+5V power supply See No.1 in the
Low
Indicators error table
LED1, Something is
LED2, wrong with the See No.2 in the
Low
LED3 and TP1 standard table
LED4 are power supply
still on voltage of point
Indicator Board
6 when the VLL1, VVL2, See No.5 in the
abnormal error Medium
tube is VVL3 and VVL4 table
filled with 2.2V0.1V
fluid or are U7, R15, R19,
off when no R32, R17, R13,
fluid exists R14, R18, R21,
in the tube. R5, R11, R30, Re-solder or
R22, R12, R31, Medium change the
R4, R23, R25, component
R26, R27 or R28
are damaged (or
rosin jointed).

5.7 Laser Control Board


5.7.1 Introduction
The laser control board controls the laser to ensure it is stable and moderate.

5.7.2 Board Composition


Function

Power conditioning
Laser drive current monitoring
Constant-laser power controlling

5-126
Hardware System

Block diagram

Figure 5-35 Block diagram of the laser control board

Description

Power conditioning
The power conditioning module filters the 12V power sent by the data board. After filtering,
the ripple is less than 100mV.

Laser drive current monitoring


The working current of the laser is measured and sent to the data board for monitoring.

Constant-laser power controlling


The laser control board controls the laser by constant-power method. I.e. the laser output
power is monitored by the inner photoelectrical detector, and the results obtained forms a
closed loop system through negative feedback to ensure the constant-power output. The
power is controlled (3mW-5mW) by adjusting the potentiometer VR1 on the board.

Interface definition

The laser control board is configured with 2 external connectors. One is the J1 connecting the
mother board (connecting data board through the mother board), the other one is the J2
connecting the laser, as the figure shows.

5-127
Hardware System

Figure 5-36 Interface layout of the laser control board

Table 5-81 Definition of J1 (connecting the mother board)


PIN Definition Note Direction I/O Level
1 AVSS -12V Analog power I -12V
supply
2 AGND Analog ground
3 LASER Monitoring voltage of No greater than 5V
laser drive current
4 AVCC 12V Analog power supply I 12V
#CONTROL Control signals produced I/O Low level: 0.8V
by standard voltage High level: OC door
of 5V
6 VCC 5V digital power supply I 5V

5-128
Hardware System

Table 5-82 Definition of J2 (connecting the laser)


No. Name Note Direction Level
I/O
1 LDA Anode of semi-conductor laser O -
diode
2 LDC Cathode of semi-conductor laser I -
diode
3 PDA Anode of semi-conductor laser I -
receiver

Assembly drawing

Figure 5-37 Assembly drawing of the laser control board

5.7.3 Adjustment and Test Points


Adjust the slide rheostat VR1 clockwise, then the resistance of the VR1 connecting circuit, the
voltage of the test point TP2VREF and the laser intensity increases. Adjust the slide rheostat
VR1 anticlockwise, then the resistance of the VR1 connecting circuit, the voltage of the test
point TP2VREF and the laser intensity decreases.
Adjust the voltage of TP2VREF to 4.0-4.2V (adjustable as per the situation), then the voltage of
TPILD is 1.0-3V (note: the laser works normally).

5-129
Hardware System

Never try to plug or unplug the semi-conductor laser before the power
supply is cut off.

Do adjust the slide rheostat gradually increased.

See the test points in the table below and their locations on the board in the assembly drawing.

Table 5-83Test points of the laser control board

Test Signal under Function


No.
point test
1 A+12V AVCC The +12V power from the data board
2 A-12V AVSS The -12V power from the data board
The 5V power from the data board. It enables the
3 D5V VCC
upper photocoupler.
Digital \
4 AGND ground on
board
The 2.5V standard voltage produced by the U1
5 TPVREF VREF
chip.
Double voltage to ground of the rheostat
6 TP2VREF 2VREF sliding-end. It controls the intensity of the laser in
direct ratio.
The step-down voltage on R1, R21 or R1/R21
7 TPIPD PDA caused by the feedback current signals from the
photoelectrical receiving part of the laser.
The working current signals of the diode part of the
laser. It reflexes the working current of the diode
8 TPILD LASER part through the voltage of TPILD, detecting
whether the laser is working under the expected
status.

5.7.4 Assembly and disassembly


See Chapter 7 Optical System for details.

5.7.5 Troubleshooting
The troubleshooting information of the laser control board is listed in the table below.

5-130
Hardware System

Table 5-84 Troubleshooting the laser control board

Error Recommended action


No. Error Possible Causes
Features
Improperly connected Reconnect the cable or
or disconnected with change a new cable
the mother board
Check and make sure the
Improper power sent
power sent by the mother
The voltage of to the laser control
board and the data board
the A+12V test board
+12V power is proper.
1 point exceeds
supply error Something is wrong Check the circuit on the
the range of
with the power board.
12V0.6V
control circuit on the
board. Grounding
short-circuits. The
power is lower or
higher.
Something is wrong
The voltage of with the power
the A-12V test control circuit on the
-12V power Check the circuit on the
2 point exceeds board. Grounding
supply error board.
the range of short-circuits. The
-12V0.6V power is lower or
higher.
Improperly connected Reconnect the cable or
or disconnected with change a new cable
The voltage of
the mother board
the D5V test
5V power Improper power is Check and make sure the
3 point exceeds
supply error sent to the laser power sent by the mother
the range of
control board by the board and the data board
5V0.25V
data board or mother is proper.
board.
Improperly connected Reconnect the cable or
or disconnected with change a new cable
The voltage of
the mother board
Control signal the signal
4 Improper control Check and make sure the
error #CONTROL
signals sent by the signals sent by the mother
0.8V
data board or mother board and the data board
board are proper.

5-131
Hardware System

The voltage of First ensure the -12V Re-solder or change the


TPVREF power works U1
Reference
5 2.5V0.1V normally. Then, the
voltage error
(regards -12V chip U1 is rosin
as reference) jointed or damaged.
First ensure the Re-solder or change the
TPVREF is normal. components
Then, the slide
Laser The voltage of rheostat is rosin
intensity TP2VREF is jointed or damaged.
6 control abnormal Or, something is
reference (should be wrong with the
voltage error 4V-4.1V) soldering of the
operation amplifier
U2 and its
peripherals.
Laser diode Re-connect or change the
damaged or connection cable, or
connected improperly change the laser diode
Laser The voltage of 5V voltage error See No.3 in the table
intensity TPILD Control signals error See No.4 in the table and
7 monitoring exceeds the or succeeding control check the succeeding
signals TPILD range of circuit error circuit.
output error 1.0-3V The operation Re-solder or change the
amplifier U3 and its components
peripherals are rosin
jointed or damaged

5-132
Hardware System

5.8 Pre-amplification board


5.8.1 Introduction
The pre-amplification board conducts the optical-electrical conversion to the two scattered
lights (FS-low-angle scattered light; SS-high-angle scattered light) come from the flow cell and
amplifies the signals. The amplifying boards of the low-angle signal and the high-angle signal
share one PCB. The amplification factor is obtained by soldering the resistors.

5.8.2 Board Composition


Function

Power conditioning
Optical-electrical converting
Signal conditioning

Block diagram

Figure 5-38 Block diagram of the pre-amplification board

Description

Power conditioning
The power conditioning module filters the 12V power sent by the data board. After filtering,
the ripple is less than 50mV.

Optical-electrical converting
The optical-electrical converting module converts the optical signals into the electrical signals
by the photodiode.
Signal conditioning

5-133
Hardware System

The current signals are transferred into the voltage signals through I/V and then sent to the
succeeding amplifying-conditioning module for further processing. Then, the data board input
required signals are obtained.

Interface definition

The FS/SS pre-amplification board is configured with one external connector respectively, i.e.
the J1 connector connecting the mother board (connecting data board through the mother
board). The layout of the board is shown below.

Figure 5-39 Interface layout of the pre-amplification board

Table 5-85 Definition of J1 (connecting the mother board)


PIN Definition Note Direction I/O Level
1 AGND Analog ground
2 FS/SS Pre-amplification board 1V
output voltage signals
3 SHELL Shielding ground - 0
4 AVSS A-12V analog power supply I -12V5%
5 AGND Analog ground
6 AVCC A+12V analog power supply I 12V5%

5-134
Hardware System

The laser control board is configured with 2 external connectors. One is the J1 connecting the
mother board (connecting data board through the mother board), the other one is the J2
connecting the laser.

Figure 5-40 Interface layout of the laser control board

Table 5-86 Definition of J1 (connecting the mother board)


PIN Definition Note Direction I/O Level
1 AVSS -12V Analog power supply I -12V
2 AGND Analog ground
3 LASER Monitoring voltage of 5V
laser drive current
4 AVCC 12V Analog power supply I 12V
#CONTRO Control signals produced I/O Low level: 0.8V
L by standard voltage High level: OC
door of 5V
6 VCC 5V digital power supply I 5V

5-135
Hardware System

Table 5-87 Definition of J2 (connecting the laser)


No. Name Note Direction Level
I/O
1 LDA Anode of semi-conductor laser O -
diode
2 LDC Cathode of semi-conductor laser I -
diode
3 PDA Anode of semi-conductor laser I -
receiver

Assembly drawing

(a) Top

5-136
Hardware System

(b) Bottom

Figure 5-41 Assembly drawing of the FS/SS pre-amplification board

5.8.3 Adjustment and Test Points


No adjustment components. See the test points in the table below and their location on the
board in the assembly drawing.

Table 5-88 Test points definition of the pre-amplification board

Test Signal under Function


No.
point test
Digital \
1 AGND ground on
board
2 +12V AVCC The +12V power from the data board
3 -12V AVSS The -12V power from the data board
4 OUT OUT FS/SS pre-amplification board output signals
The 5V power from the data board. It enables the
5 D5V VCC
upper photocoupler.

5.8.4 Disassembly and assembly


See Chapter 7 Optical System for details.

5-137
Hardware System

5.8.5 Troubleshooting

Table 5-89 Troubleshooting the pre-amplification board

No. Error Error Features Possible Causes Recommended action


Improper cable connection
with the mother board or the Reconnect the cable or
data board, or disconnection change a new cable
caused by a broken cable
The voltage of the
Check whether the proper
12V +12V test point Improper 12V power sent by
power supply is sent by
power exceeds the range of the data board or mother
1 the mother board or the
supply 120.6V; or the board
data board
error ripple noise is
Rosin joint or damage
greater than 50mV.
happens to the +12V test
Re-solder or change the
point relating inductor L1 or
component
the capacitors C24, C27, C20
and C23.
Improper cable connection
with the mother board or the Reconnect the cable or
data board, or disconnection change a new cable
caused by a broken cable
The voltage of the
Check whether the proper
-12V -12V test point Improper -12V power sent by
power supply is sent by
power exceeds the range of the data board or mother
2 the mother board or the
supply -120.6V; or the board
data board
error ripple noise is
Rosin joint or damage
greater than 50mV.
happens to the -12V test point
Re-solder or change the
relating inductor L2 or the
component
capacitors C22, C26, C25 and
C21.
Channel The FS board is installed in
SS output signals
3 output the location of the SS board Change the board
too weak (supposing
value by mistake.
it is caused only by
error R4, R5 or R6 resistance error, Re-solder or change the
the circuit problems)
rosin jointed or damaged component
FS output signals The SS board is installed in
too strong the location of the FS board Change the board
(supposing it is by mistake.

5-138
Hardware System

R4, R5 or R6 resistance error, Re-solder or change the


rosin jointed or damaged component
The The photodiode D1 or R1 is Re-solder or change the
pre-amplification rosin jointed or damaged. component
board (FF/SS)
output signals are The U2 or U3 is rosin jointed Re-solder or change the
too weak to be or damaged. component
detected.
Something is wrong
Check whether the relating
with the band width
resistors and capacitors R4, Re-solder or change the
of the
R5, R6, C1, C5 and C4 are component
pre-amplification
rosin jointed or damaged.
board (FF/SS).

5-139
Hardware System

5.9 Indicator Board


5.9.1 Introduction
The indicator board realizes the function of analyzer status indicating and buzzer alarming.

5.9.2 Board Composition


Function

Analyzer working status indicating


Buzzer alarming

Description

Analyzer working status indicating


The indicator board indicates the working status of the analyzer by a two-color indicator. When
the system works normally, the indicator displays green. When error happens, the indicator
turns red.
Buzzer alarming
The alarming function is realized by the buzzing of the buzzer.

Interface definition

The indicator board is configured with one external connector J1.

Table 5-90 Interface definition of the indicator board


Direction
PIN Name Note Level
I/O
1 VCC Power supply - +5V
4 FAULT Error indicator (red) I TTL
Working indicator
5 WORK I TTL
(green)
7 BUZ Buzzer I TTL
8 GND Ground - 0

5-140
Hardware System

Assembly drawing

Figure 5-42 Assembly drawing of the indicator board

5.9.3 Disassembly and assembly method

Purpose

Damaged indicator board needs to be replaced by a new one.

Tools

107 cross-headed screwdriver


107 flat-headed screwdriver

Disassembly

1. Shut down the analyzer.


2. Open the front cover assembly.
3. Use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove the 2 tapping screws (PT3X6) fixing the
indicator board, and then remove the board.

5-141
Hardware System

Figure 5-43 Disassemble the indicator board


1---Tapping screw (PT3X6) 2---Indicator board
3---Front cover

Verification

Turn on the analyzer and start up the PC when finish replacing the indicator board. During the
process from startup self-test to ready, closely observe the indicator and the buzzer, if they
work normally, the replacement is successful.

5.9.4 Troubleshooting

Table 5-91 Troubleshooting the indicator board


No. Error Causes and recommended action
1 Indicator doesn't work If the indicator could work off and on when you shaking
the wiring on the J1 connector, then, it might be caused
by the improper connection. If nothing is wrong with the
connection and the system works normally, then, the
diode of the indicator might be damaged.
2 The buzzer is mute when If the buzzer could buzz off and on when you shaking the
system alarming. wiring on the J1 connector, then, it might be caused by
the improper connection. If nothing is wrong with the
connection or the buzzer buzzes abnormally (e.g. a
hoarse buzzing), then, the buzzer might be damaged.

5-142
6 Maintenance

6.1 Maintenance Module and the Corresponding


Settings

No. Type Maintenance Settings to be reset


Re-adjust the position of the sampling assembly
Replace the drive board
1 by software
Re-adjust the gains, calibration factors and
Replace the data board
2 Boards count-related settings

Replace the power board


3 Re-conduct the safety test
4 Replace the volumetric board Reset the count time and the start signal delay
1. Re-adjust the position of the sampling
Disassemble and assemble the assembly to the DIFF bath.
DIFF bath assembly or have it 2. If the temperature and the mixing are greatly
upgraded changed, then re-adjusting the optical gain is
5 necessary.
Remove the DIFF bath assembly
from the analyzer and then Re-adjust the position of the sampling assembly
6 re-assemble it to the DIFF bath by software
Mechanism 1. Manually adjust the horizontal position of the
Replace and
mix assembly.
disassemble/assemble the front
2. Re-adjust the position of the clipper by
cover
7 software.
1. Manually adjust the horizontal position of the
Replace and sample feeding assembly.
disassemble/assemble the 2. Re-adjust the position of the sampling
bottom cover assembly to the sample compartment and the
8 autoloading position by software.
1. Re-adjust the gains and the calibration factors.
Baths Replace the aperture
9 2. Reset the count time and the start signal delay.
1. Re-adjust the gains and the calibration factors.
Replace the bath
10 2. Reset the count time and the start signal delay.

6-1
Maintenance

1. Re-enter the volume of the volumetric tube at


Replace the volumetric tube the setting screen.
11 2. Reset the count time and the start signal delay.
12 Replace HGB Re-adjust the gain and calibration of HGB.
The vacuum created in the
13 sequence is changed Reset the count time and the start signal delay
Sequence
Sample results are changed
14 greatly Re-adjust the gain and the calibration.

6-2
Maintenance

6.2 General
You can service the analyzer as per Section 6.2 6.6. After repairing, follow the verification
procedures to verify the analyzers status.

6.3 Disassembling the Panels

6.3.1 Removing the left door


Purpose

To disassemble the electric and fluidic parts inside the left side of the analyzer, follow this
procedure to remove the left door.
Tools

107 flat-headed screwdriver


Removal

1. Power off the analyzer and unplug the power cord


2. Insert 107 the flat-headed screwdriver into the slot of the door lock, and turn the lock
tongue 90 counterclockwise.
3. Pull the side door outward from the bottom.

Figure 6-1 Removing the left door

Installation

Install the left door as per the above-mentioned steps in the reverse order.

6-3
Maintenance

6.3.2 Removing the right door


Purpose

To disassemble the electric and fluidic parts inside the right side of the analyzer, follow this
procedure to remove the right door.

Tools

107 flat-headed screwdriver

Removal

10. Power off the analyzer and unplug the power cord.
11. Insert 107 flat-headed screwdriver into the slot of the door lock, and turn the lock tongue
90 counterclockwise.
12. Pull the side door outward from the bottom.

Make sure that the power supply is shut off when you remove the right door;
otherwise, the analyzer will alarm and stop running.

Figure 6-2 Removing the right door

Installation

Install the right door as per the above-mentioned procedures in the reverse order.

6-4
Maintenance

6.3.3 Removing the top cover

Purpose

To disassemble the optical components, boards, cables and connectors, follow this procedure
to remove the top cover.

Tools

107 cross-headed screwdriver

Removal

4. Power off the analyzer and unplug the power cord.


5. Use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove the three M4X8 small panhead screws.
6. Pull out the top cover from back upward.

Figure 6-3 Removing top cover


1 M4X8 small panhead screw 2 top cover

Installation

Install the top cover as per the above-mentioned procedures in the reverse order.

6-5
Maintenance

6.3.4 Removing the back panel

Purpose

To maintain the fluidic connectors and electric circuits at the center of analyzer, follow this
procedure to remove the back panel.

Tools

107 cross-headed screwdriver

Removal

1. Power off the analyzer and unplug the power cord.


2. Use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove the two M4X8 small panhead screws
used for fixing the back panel of power supply
3. Pull the back panel outward.

Figure 6-4 Removing the back panel of power supply


1 M4X8 small panhead screw 2 back panel of power supply

Installation

Install the back panel as per the above-mentioned procedures in the reverse order.

6-6
Maintenance

6.3.5 Removing the front cover assembly

Purpose

To maintain the fluidic system and syringe inside the front cover, follow this procedure to
remove the front cover.

Tools

107 cross-headed screwdriver


107 flat-headed screwdriver

Removal

1. Power off the analyzer and unplug the power cord.


2. Remove the left door as per section 6.3.1 .
3. Remove the right door as per section 6.3.1 .
4. Remove the top cover board as per section 6.3.3 .
5. Use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove the six M4X8 countersunk head screws
on the left, right and top side of the front cover.
6. Pull the front cover outward by 30 - 50 mm, and disconnect the indicator connector from
the indicator board.
7. Remove the front cover forward.

Figure 6-5 Removing the front cover assembly

6-7
Maintenance

1 M4X8 small panhead screw 2 top cover


3 indicator light board 4 right door
5 M4X8 countersunk head screw 6 front cover assembly
7 left door

Installation

Install the front cover as per the above-mentioned procedures in the reverse order.

6-8
Maintenance

6.4 Replacing the Valves, Pumps and Syringes


(Reagent container and reagent inlet, waste bump, fluidic valve, pinch valve, syringe)

Figure 6-6 Removing fluidic system inside the left door


1 valve assembly I 2 M4X12 small panhead screws
3 plain washer 3 4 M3X12 cross-headed panhead screw
(with lock washer)
5 diluent syringe 6 lyse syringe
7 M4X8 small panhead screws 8 pressure chamber
9 air pump 10valve assembly II

6-9
Maintenance

Figure 6-7 Removing fluidic system inside the right door


1 valve 2 M3X8 small panhead screw
3 M4X12 small panhead screw 4 vacuum chamber
5 waste pump assembly 6 valve assembly III

7 pinch valve

6-10
Maintenance

Figure 6-8 Removing fluidic system inside the front door


1 valve 2 pressure-leakage valve
3 M3X8 small panhead screw 4 sheath syringe
5 injection syringe 6 sampling syringe
7 plain washer 3 8 M3X12 cross-headed panhead screw
(with lock washer)

6.4.1 Replacing the valve

Purpose

In case of malfunction of a valve(s), replace the valve.

Tools

107 cross-headed screwdriver


107 flat-headed screwdriver

6-11
Maintenance

Removal

Follow these two procedures to disassemble the valve assemblies.


To remove the valve assembly (valve assembly I, valve assembly II, or valve assembly III)
1. To remove valve assembly I and II, remove the left door (as per section 6.3.1 ); to remove
valve assembly III, remove the right door (as per section 6.3.2 ).
2. Disconnect all tubes connected to the valve(s) as shown in Figure 6-6, Figure 6-7, and
Figure 6-8.
3. Use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove the M4X12 small panhead screws
fastening the valve assembly.
4. Pull the valve assembly, outward and disconnect all lines from the assembly..
5. Take out valve assembly.

To remove a single valve (including pinch valve, or single valve on the valve assemblies)
1. To remove the valve on the left side, remove the left door. (as per section 6.3.1 ); to
remove the valve on the right side, remove the right door. (as per section 6.3.2 ); to
remove the valve on the front side, remove the front cover assembly. (as per section
6.3.2 )
2. Disconnect all pipes connected to the valves as shown in Figure 6-6, Figure 6-7, and
Figure 6-8. (if a pinch valve needs to be removed, remember to pinch the corresponding
tube).
3. Use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove the two M3X8 small panhead screws
fastening the valve assembly.
4. Pull the valve outward, and disconnect the lines connected to the valve. Then take the
valve out.

Figure 6-9 Valve assembly I

6-12
Maintenance

Figure 6-10 Valve assembly II

Figure 6-11 Valve assembly III


1 valve 2 M3X8 small panhead screw
3 valve bracket

Installation

Install the valve assembly as per the above-mentioned procedures in the reverse order.

Verification

1. Check the fluidic connections.


2. Power on and verify the installation.

6-13
Maintenance

6.4.2 Replacing the Pressure Chamber

Purpose

In case of malfunction, replace the pressure chamber.

Tools

107 cross-headed screwdriver


107 flat-headed screwdriver

Removal

Follow these two procedures to disassemble the pressure chamber.


To remove the pressure chamber:
1. Remove the left door (as per section 6.3.1 ).
2. Disconnect all tubes connected to the assembly as shown in Figure 6-6.
3. Use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove the four M4X8 small panhead screws.
4. Pull the pressure chamber out.

To disassemble the pressure chamber:


1. Use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove the four M3X12 panhead washer screws,
then take out the end cap and mounting plate;
2. Use the 107 flat-headed screwdriver to remove the airproof screw fixed on the end cap,
then take out the small O ring (9.5x1.8).
3. Take out the big O ring (48.7x1.8).

6-14
Maintenance

Figure 6-12 Removing pressure chamber


1M3X12 cross-headed panhead 2 end cap
screw (with lock washer)
3 O ring 48.7x1.8 4 O ring 9.5 x 1.8
5 airproof screw 6 mounting plate
7 air pressure chamber

Installation

Install the pressure chamber as per the above-mentioned procedures in the reverse order.

Verification

1. Check if all parts are correctly assembled and tightened.


2. Check the fluidic connections..
3. Power on and verify the installation.

6.4.3 Replacing the Vacuum Chamber


Purpose

In case of malfunction, replace the vacuum chamber.

Tools

107 cross-headed screwdriver


107 flat-headed screwdriver

6-15
Maintenance

Removal

Follow these two procedures to disassemble the vacuum chamber.


To remove the vacuum chamber:
1. Remove the right door (as per section 6.3.2 )
2. Disconnect all tubes connected to the assembly as shown in Figure 6-7.
3. Use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove the two M4X12 small panhead screws.
4. Pull vacuum chamber outward.

To disassemble the vacuum chamber:


1. Use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove the four M3X12 panhead washer screws,
then take out the end cap and mounting plate.
2. Use the 107 flat-headed screwdriver to remove the air tightening screw fixed on the end
cap, then take out the small O ring (9.5x1.8).
3. Take out the big O ring (48.7x1.8).

Figure 6-13 Removing vacuum chamber


1M3X12 cross-headed panhead 2 end cap
screw (with lock washer)
3 O ring (48.7x1.8) 4 O ring (9.5x1.8)
5 airproof screw 6 mounting plate
7 air pressure chamber

Installation

Install the vaccum chamber as per the above-mentioned procedures in the reverse order.

6-16
Maintenance

Verification

1. Check if all parts are correctly assembled and tightened.


2. Check the reagent connections.
3. Power on and verify the installation.

6.4.4 Replacing the Syringe Assembly

Purpose

In case of malfunction, replace the syringe assembly.

Tools

107 cross-headed screwdriver


107 flat-headed screwdriver
2 mm hexagon wrench
2.5 mm hexagon wrench
150 mm monkey wrench

Removal

Follow these two procedures to disassemble the syringe.

To remove the syringe assembly


1. To the remove lyse syringe or diluent syringe, remove the left door (as per section 6.3.1 );
to the remove sheath syringe, injection syringe or sampling syringe, remove the front
cover assembly (as per section 6.3.4 or 6.3.5 ).
2. Disconnect all tubes connected to the syringe as shown in Figure 6-6 and Figure 6-8.
3. Use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove the four M3X12 panhead washer screws
fixing syringe and 3 plain washer. .
4. Incline the assembly outward, and pull it out by 30 - 50mm. Disconnect the wire of the
motor and the photocoupler, and then take the assembly out. (* Note that the four rubber
washers of the syringe should be kept well for reassembly.)

To disassemble the syringe:


1. Remove the lyse syringe, injection syringe, and sample syring
a. To remove the glass syringe unit on the lyse syringe (three 2.5ml syringes on the
assembly), remove the left door (as per section 6.3.1 ).
b. To remove the glass syringe unit on the injection syringe or on the sample syringe (250ul
and 100ul respectively), remove the front cover (as per section 6.3.4 or 6.3.5 ).

6-17
Maintenance

c. The syringe assembly needs not to be disassembled wholly. Use the 107 flat-headed
screwdriver to remove the M4X8 special screw fixing the syringe. Rotate the left glass
syringe unit with hand, and then take out the washer of syringe. (as per Figure 6-14).

Apply some glue to the threads. Do not proceed to the next step until the
glue is dry.

Figure 6-14 Removing glass syringe unit


1 M4X8 special screw 2 glass syringe unit
3 washer
d. Use the 2.5mm hexagon wrench to remove the two M3X8 socket head screws on the
electric switch and remove the switch. Use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove
the two M3X6 cross-headed panhead screws, and then remove the electric switch (
e. Figure 6-15).

6-18
Maintenance

Figure 6-15 Removing syringe assembly


1MGN9-C1-R95-Z0CM Linear 2 syringe slider
rolling guide
3 M3X8 socket head screw 4 43F4J-05-010 linear stepping motor
5 M4X8 retaining screw 6 syringe photocoupler bracket
7 PHOTOELEC Potical Sensor 8 M3X6 cross-headed panhead screw

f. Use 2.5mm hexagon wrench to remove the four M3X8 socket head screws on syringe
slider. Use 2 mm hexagon wrench to remove M4X8 retaining screw on syringe slider and
remove the syringe slider. Use 2.5 mm hexagon wrench to remove the four M3X8 socket
head screws fastening the linear stepping motor , then remove the linear stepping motor
(Figure 6-15);

Make sure to insert the retaining screw into the corresponding hole, and
apply some glue to the threads.

g. Use 2.5mm hexagon wrench to remove the three M3X8 socket head screws on linear
rolling guide, and then remove the linear rolling guide. (*Note: The slider should not be off
its guide way.)

2. Remove diluent syringe and sheath syringe (*Note: Two syringes are the same, both being
the 12.5ml Mindray syringe.)

6-19
Maintenance

a. To remove the Mindray syringe unit on the diluent syringe, remove the left door (as per
section 6.3.1 )
b. To remove the Mindray syringe unit on the sheath syringe, remove the front cover
assembly (as per section 6.3.1 or 6.3.5 )
c. The syringe assembly should not be removed wholly. Use the 2.5 mm hexagon wrench to
remove the two M3X12 socket head screws on the Mindray syringe unit, and remove the
Mindray syringe unit. (Figure 6-16)

Figure 6-16 Removing Mindray syringe unit


1 M3X12 socket head screw 2 2 Mindray syringe unit

d. Use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove the four M3X10 panhead screws. The
ceramic plug, flange, lock ring and O ring can be disassembled in the axis direction.
(Figure 6-17)

6-20
Maintenance

Figure 6-17 Removing Mindray syringe unit


1 12.5ml ceramic plug 2 M3X10 cross-headed panhead screw
3 12.5ml syringe flange 4 12.5ml syringe lock ring
5 O ring 20X3 6 12.5ml syringe body

Relevant parts should be cleaned up before installation.

Installation

Install the Mindray syringe unit as per the above-mentioned procedures in the reverse order.

Verification

1. Check if all parts are correctly assembled and tightened.


2. Check wire conections.
3. Check reagent connections.
4. Power on and verify the installation.

6-21
Maintenance

6.4.5 Replacing the Waste Pump

Purpose

In case of malfunction, replace the waste pump.

Tools

107 cross-headed screwdriver


107 flat-headed screwdriver
100 mm monkey wrench

Removal

Follow these two procedures to disassemble the waste pump.


To remove the waste pump:
1. Power on the analyzer to empty the fluidic system. Power off the analyzer and unplug the
power cord from the wall outlet.
2. Remove the right door (as per section 6.3.2 ).
3. Disconnect the four tubes connected to the pump;
4. Disconnect the two wires connected to the pump;
5. Use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove the two M4X12 small panhead screws
on fastening assembly as shown in Figure 6-7.
6. Move the assembly left, make the fastening hole out of the bolt, and then remove it.

To disassemble the waste pump:


1. Use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove the four M3X8 small panhead screws
fixing the pump.
2. Remove the waste pump
3. Use the 100 mm monkey wrench to remove the three nuts and take out the three washers.
4. Remove the pump mounting plate.
5. Remove three shock pads via hand.

6-22
Maintenance

Figure 6-18 Removing waste pump


1 M3X8 small panhead screws 2 rotary pump
3 pump mounting plate 4 8-32UNC-2B nut
5 GB93 4 washer 6 shock pad
7 bracket

Installation

Install the waste pump as per the above-mentioned procedures in the reverse order.

Verification

1. Check if all parts are correctly assembled and tightened.


2. Check the electrical connection of the rotatory pump.
3. Check the reagent connections.
4. Power on and verify the installation.

6-23
Maintenance

6.5 Replacing the Bath/Aperture Assembly

Purpose

In case of malfunction of the WBC or RBC reaction bath assembly, replace the corresponding
assembly.

Tools

107 cross-headed screwdriver


107 flat-headed screwdriver

Removal

1. Power on the analyzer to empty the fluidic system. Power off the analyzer and unplug the
power cord from the wall outlet.
2. Remove the left door (as per section 6.3.1 ).
3. Remove the right door (as per section 6.3.1 ).
4. Remove the top cover (as per section 6.3.1 ).
5. Use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove the two M3X6 cross-headed washer
screws on the top cover of data board shielding box, and then remove the top cover.
(Figure 6-19)
6. Disconnect the bath signal lines of the WBC reaction bath or RBC reaction bath that needs
to be removed, and then loosen all buckles fastening the lines in the direction of wiring,
until the wire is drawn to the bath.
7. Use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove M3X8 small panhead screw on bath
shield and take it out, then remove the shield. (Figure 6-20)
8. Use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove the two M3X8 small panhead screws on
bath presser and take it out, then remove the bath presser. (Figure 6-20)
9. Pull the bath out with a distance of about 50-80 mm. Disconnect all tubes connected to the
bath. Get the signal wire from wire-protective ring and then remove the bath assembly.

6-24
Maintenance

Figure 6-19 Removing signal lines of bath


1 M3X6 cross-headed panhead 2 top cover of data board shielding box
washer screw
3 data board

Figure 6-20 Removing bath assembly

1 shielding plate 2 WBC bath


3 bath presser 4 M3X8 small panhead screw
5 RBC bath 6 shield cover
7 isolation chamber clamp 8 isolation chamber

6-25
Maintenance

Installation

Install the bath assembly as per the above-mentioned procedures in the reverse order.

Verification

1. Check if all parts are mounted to the former position and are fastened.
2. Check if the connection of signal lines of WBC or RBC is correct or not.
3. Check if the connection of power line and reagent pipe is correct or not.
4. Power on and verify the installation.

6-26
Maintenance

6.6 Replacing the Sampling Module and Adjusting


Position

6.6.1 Replacing the Sample Probe and Wipe

Purpose

To remove or replace the sample probe and probe wipe, follow the steps in this section.

Tools

107 cross-headed screwdriver (107X75)


Replace parts according to requirements:
Probe wipe
open vial sample probe / piercing needle
metal wipe clip
sample probe presser

Preparation

1. Power off the analyzer if it is running.


2. Turn off the main power switch on the right side of the analyzer and unplug the power cord.
3. Remove the right door (as per section 6.3.2 ).
4. Move the sampling module to the back of analyzer.

Removal

1. Remove the probe wipe from the sampling module (Figure 6-21)
a. Disconnect the two tubes from the probe wipe.
b. Pull the wipe downward to remove the probe wipe, as indicated by the arrow in the
figure below, and remove the wipe clip.
c. Separate the wipe from sampling module in the direction of arrow
d. Get out the inlet and outlet pipe from the wipe.

6-27
Maintenance

Figure 6-21 Removing wipe


1 pipe clamp 2 presser under the guiding rod
3 probe wipe 4 wipe clip

2. Remove the sample probe from the sampling module. (Figure 6-22)
a. Pull out the sample aspiration tube from the above of sample probe.
b. Use the cross-headed screwdriver to remove the retaining screw (M3X8 small
panhead screw) on probe presser, and take out the fixing flake.
c. Get out the probe from sideward.

6-28
Maintenance

Figure 6-22 Removing sample probe

1 slider 2 sample probe


3 presser 4 M3X8 small panhead screw

When remove the sample probe, get probe wipe out of the presser under
guiding rod. The probe tip may contain biohazardous materials. Exercise
caution when handling it and keep it to the right position.

Installation

To install a new sample probe and wipe, repeat the above removal step 1 or 2 in the reverse
order.

6.6.2 Replacing the Optical Sensor

Purpose

To remove or replace the optical sensor, follow the steps in this section.

6-29
Maintenance

Tools

107 cross-headed screwdriver107X75


Replace parts according to requirements:
Sensor module on motor position3003-21-34925
Photocoupler fixer

Preparation

1. Power off the analyzer and unplug the power cord.


2. Turn off the main power switch on the right side of the analyzer and unplug the power cord.
3. Remove the right door (as per section 6.3.2 ).

Removal

1. Remove the vertical optical sensor module (Figure 6-23)


a. Disconnect the connector of the sensor to be replaced ( not shown in the figure).
b. Use the cross-headed screwdriver to remove the M3x6 screw on the sensor.
c. Remove the sensor module from the bracket.

Figure 6-23 Removing vertical optical sensor


1 M3x6 cross-headed screw 2 sensor module on motor position
3 bracket

2. Remove the horizontal optical sensor module (Figure 6-24)

6-30
Maintenance

a. Use the cross-headed screwdriver to remove the M3x6 screw on the photocoupler
presser to be replaced
b. Gently pull out the photocoupler presser (with the sensor module on motor position)
from the sample mother board and get out the plug of sensor module from the
corresponding hole.
c. Disconnect the sensor connector (not shown in figure). Take out the photocoupler
presser and the sensor module on motor position.
d. Use the cross-headed screwdriver to remove the M3x6 screw fixing the sensor module.
Separate the photocoupler presser from the sensor module on the motor position.

Figure 6-24 Removing optical sensor on horizontal position

Installation

To install a new optical sensor, repeat the above removal step 1 or 2 in the reverse order.

6.6.3 Removing the Sampling Module


Purpose

To remove the sampling module, follow steps in this section.

Tools

107 cross-headed screwdriver (107X75)


wire cutter
Replace parts according to requirements:

6-31
Maintenance

Sampling module

Preparation

1. Power off the analyzer.


2. Trun off the main power switch on the right side of the analyzer and unplug the power cord.
3. Move the analyzer to turn its right side outward, and expose the back side as much as
possible.
4. Open the back cover of the analyzer (as per section 6.3.2 )
5. Remove the right side door (as per section 6.3.2 )
6. Move the sampling module to the back of the analyzer.

Removal

1. Disconnect all tubes from on the sampling module, and cut the binding belt with the wire
cutter. Remove the tubes from the whole sampling module.
2. Disconnect all the connectors of the vertical part of sampling module, and unplug the
connector from the motor directly.
3. Disconnect all the connectors of the horizontal part of sampling module from the space left
by opened back cover at the back of the analyzer. (BC-5300 has four connectors, and
BC-5380 has five connectors). Unplug the connectors from the motor directly.
4. Use the cross-headed screwdriver to remove the two M3X8 small panhead screws fixing
the joint.
5. Use the cross-headed screwdriver to remove the four M4X12 cross panhead screws fixing
the sampling module.
6. Hold the sampling module and move it gently outward. Pull out the optical sensor module
from corresponding hole with caution. Be careful not to damage or break the line.
7. Check if all connectors of optical sensor module are drawn out from the corresponding
holes, then hold out the sampling module.

6-32
Maintenance

Figure 6-25 Removing the sampling module


1 M3X8 small panhead screw 2 link
3 spacer 4 sampling module
5 M4X12 panhead screw

Watch for the sampling probe when removing sampling module. If


necessary, remove sampling probe first as introduced in section 6.6.1 to
avoid potential biologic pollution.

6-33
Maintenance

Installation

To replace new sampling module, repeat the above step 1 to 7 in the reverse order.

6.6.4 Adjusting sample probe position


Purpose

Adjust the sample probe position at the DIFF bath as per the following procedures.

Tools

Sample probe locating clamp

Preparation

1. Turn on the main unit.


2. Start up the PC, and then start the software by clicking the icon on the desktop.

Adjusting sample probe position

1. Click MENU Service Debug to enter the Debug screen. Put the DIFF locating
clamp in the aperture of the DIFF bath.
2. Click DIFF Bath Position, and then click Start to move the sample probe onto the DIFF
bath.

Figure 6-26 Start adjusting


3. Click Left, Right, Up and Down to adjust the sample probe, making it inserts in the
position in front of the round slot, as shown in Figure 6-27. Then, click Stop to save the
position of the sample probe.

6-34
Maintenance

Figure 6-27 Adjusting the sample probe position


4. Click Ok to finish adjusting the sample probe position at the DIFF bath.

6.7 Maintaining and Replacing the DIFF Reaction


Bath
Purpose

To remove DIFF reaction bath, follow steps in this section.

Tools

107 cross-headed screwdriver (107X75)


wire cutter
Replace parts according to requirements:
DIFF reaction bath

Preparation

1. Power off the analyzer.


2. Turn off the main power switch on the right side of the analyzer and unplug the power cord.
3. Remove the right side door (as per section 6.3.2 )

Removal

1. Use the wire cutter to cut off the binding belts fixing the tubes and remove them from the
DIFF bath assembly.
2. Use the cross-headed screwdriver to remove the two M4X8 small panhead screws fixing
the DIFF bath assembly.
3. Hold the DIFF bath assembly and move it gently outward. Expose the connectors and pipe

6-35
Maintenance

connectors at the back side, and then disconnect them.


4. Take out the DIFF bath assembly.

Figure 6-28 Removing DIFF bath assembly


1 DIFF bath assembly 2 M4X8 small panhead screw

Installation

To replace new DIFF bath assembly, repeat the above removal step 1 to 4 in the reverse order.

6-36
7 Optical System

7.1 Optical System Adjustment and Troubleshooting

Purpose

To replace and repair the optical system component in case of malfunction.

Tools

Antistatic gloves
Hexagon wrench
Cross-headed screwdriver
Flat-headed screwdriver
Horologic driver
Duke (4K-07) 7m standard particles
Oscilloscope or oscillometer

Removal and installation

Before removing the optical system component, remove the right side door and the top cover
of the analyzer first (refer to Chapter 6 Maintenance), then remove all the screws on them, as
Figure 7-1 shows. Remove the protective cover of the optical system. After component
installation, reinstall the protective cover and secure it. The above-mentioned steps will not be
repeated in the following procedures.

7-1
Optical System

Screw
s

Figure 7-1 Remove the protective cover of the optical system

7.2 Removing and Installing Optical System


Assemblies
The optical system consists of the following assemblies: the front light assembly, flow cell
assembly, rear light collimator assembly, beam splitter assembly, rear light collector assembly,
and rear light detector assembly.

Wear antistatic gloves when removing boards.

Be sure to turn off the analyzer and disconnect the power cord before
removing boards.

Do not plug/unplug the laser generator unless the power cord is


disconnected. Otherwise, the laser generator will be damaged.

7.2.1 Laser driver board

The laser driver board supplies power to the laser generator and controls the output power of
the laser.
1. Turn off the analyzer, open the laser cover and remove the connecting line from the driver
board.

7-2
Optical System

2. Remove the fixing screws, and remove the laser driver board support.
3. Replace the laser driver board and reinstall it in the reverse order, then secure the fixing
screws.

Figure 7-2 Laser driver board installation


1fixing screws of laser driver board 2fixing screws of laser driver board
support

7.2.2 Front light assembly


The front light assembly generates the laser beam that enters the flow cell. Remove and install
the assembly strictly as instructed below. See Figure 7-3 for the assembly drawing.
1. Turn off the analyzer and disconnect its power cord.
2. Disconnect the laser power connector from the laser control board. Disconnect the heater,
temperature sensor and over temperature protection switch connectors.
3. Use the hexagon wrench to remove the fixing screws at the two sides of the front light
assembly and remove the assembly.
4. Use the hexagon wrench and the cross-headed screwdriver to remove the screws fixing
the laser generator assembly and the cylindrical mirror assembly separately, and then
remove the assemblies from the front light guide assembly.

7-3
Optical System

Figure 7-3 Front light assembly


1Laser assembly 3Cylindrical mirror assembly
2Front guide assembly

5. According to the malfunction of the front light assembly, replace the whole laser assembly
or the whole cylindrical mirror assembly, install the new one on the front light assembly and
secure the assembly to the optical support.
6. Reconnect the laser power connector, heater, temperature sensor and the connector of
the over temperature protection switch.

7.2.3 Flow cell assembly

The flow cell assembly is used to create a stable sheath fluid flow, which enables the particle
tested to pass through the flow cell in a certain speed and to interact with the incident laser to
create scattered light. Remove and install the flow cell assembly strictly as instructed below.
1. Power on the analyzer to empty the fluidic pipes, then power off the analyzer and
disconnect the power cord.
2. Disconnect the sheath charging tube, sample charging tube and waste outlet tube (at the
outlet of the flow cell). Use the hexagon wrench to remove the two fixing screws and take
out the flow cell assembly carefully, as Figure 7-4 shows.

7-4
Optical System

Figure 7-4 Flow cell fluidic connecting tube


1Sample charging tube 2Sheath charing tube

3. Use the hexagon wrench to remove the two connecting screws and divide the flow cell
assembly into two parts: rectifier assembly and detecting assembly, as Figure 7-5 shows.
4. Clean or replace the detecting assembly and liquid transporting assembly as needed.

Figure 7-5 Flow cell structure


1Rectifier assembly 3Detecting assembly
2O ring 4Hexagon screw

5. Install the flow cell assembly as stated above in the reverse order.

7-5
Optical System

7.2.4 Rear light collimator assembly


The rear light collimator assembly collects the scattered light created by the particle tested and
allows the light to be tested by the rear light detector assembly. Remove the rear light
collimator assembly strictly as instructed below. See Figure 7-6 for the assembly drawing of
the rear light collimator assembly.

1. Power off the analyzer and disconnect its power cord.


2. Use the hexagon wrench to remove the fixing screws at two sides of the rear light
assembly and remove the assembly.
3. Use the hexagon wrench to remove the two screws fixing the diaphragm lens assembly to
remove the lens assembly.

Figure 7-6 Rear light collimator assembly


1Diaphragm lens assembly 2Rear light guide assembly

4. Install the new rear light diaphragm lens assembly on the rear light guide assembly to form
a new rear light collimator assembly. Ensure that the superface edge of the diaphragm
lens assembly parallels the end face edge of backward oriented assembly. Install and
secure the assembly to the optical support.

7.2.5 Beam splitter assembly


The beam splitter assembly splits the scattered light into two paths: one for the forward low
angle PD assembly and the other for the forward high angle PD assembly. See Figure 7-7 for
the assembly drawing of the beam splitter assembly.

1. Power off the analyzer and disconnect its power cord.


2. Use the hexagon wrench to remove the fixing screws at two sides of the beam splitter
assembly and remove the assembly.
3. Use the flat-headed screwdriver to remove the two clamping rings. Use the cross-headed

7-6
Optical System

screwdriver to remove the screws at the top board and the side boards to remove the
boards.
4. Remove the two protective washers to remove the beam-splitting prism.
5. When replacing or installing a new beam-splitting prism, pay attention to the direction of
the prism (see Figure 7-7 ). Install the prism following steps above in the reverse order.

Figure 7-7 Beam splitter assembly


1Base of spectroscope 4Clamping ring
2Side board 5Washer
3Top board 6Beam-splitting prism

7.2.6 Rear light collector assembly


The rear light collector assembly enhances the collection efficiency by focusing the scattered
light, which has passed the beam splitter assembly, on the PD detecting target. It consists of a
LAS assembly and a MAS assembly.

LAS assembly
1. Power off the analyzer and disconnect its power cord.
2. Use the hexagon wrench to remove the two fixing screws on the LAS assembly and
remove the LAS assembly from the optical support.
3. Use the cross-headed screwdriver to remove the two screws fixing the low angle
diaphragm and remove the diaphragm. Use the cross-headed screwdriver to remove the
two screws fixing the rear light focus lens assembly and remove the assembly.

7-7
Optical System

Figure 7-8 LAS assembly


1Low angle diaphragm 2Rear light focus lens assembly

4. Install and secure the low angle diaphragm and the rear light focus lens assembly as
needed.
5. Install the LAS assembly to the optical support and screw it with the hexagon wrench.
During securing, ensure that the diaphragm assembly is close to the M4 hexagon screws.

MAS assembly
1. Power off the analyzer and disconnect its power cord.
2. Use the hexagon wrench to remove the two screws fixing the MAS assembly and then
remove the MAS assembly from the optical support.
3. Use the cross-headed screwdriver to remove the two screws fixing the diaphragm and
then remove the diaphragm. Use the cross-headed screwdriver to remove the two screws
on the rear light focus lens assembly and then remove the assembly.

Figure 7-9 MAS assembly


1High angle diaphragm 2Rear light focus lens assembly

7-8
Optical System

4. Install and secure the diaphragm and the rear light focus lens assembly as needed.
5. Install the MAS assembly to the optical support and screw it with the hexagon wrench.
During securing, ensure that the diaphragm assembly is close to the M4 hexagon screws.

7.2.7 Rear light detector assembly


The rear light detector assembly detects the scattered light signal and converts it into electrical
signals for further processing. It consists of two parts: a forward low angle PD assembly and a
forward middle low angle PD assembly.

Forward low angle PD assembly


1. Power off the analyzer and disconnect its power cord.
2. Use the hexagon wrench to remove the screws fixing the forward low angle PD assembly
and then remove the assembly from the optical support.
3. Use the cross-headed screwdriver to remove the two screws fixing the PD board and
remove the shielding box from the forward low angle PD assembly.

Figure 7-10 Forward low angle PD assembly


1Shielding box 3PD
2Low angle pre-amplification board 4PD cover

4. Use the cross-headed screwdriver to loosen the low angle pre-amplification board, remove
the PD board, replace the corresponding parts and reinstall them orderly.
5. Assemble the shielding box to the forward low angle PD assembly and then install the
forward low angle PD assembly to the optical support.
Forward middle low angle PD assembly
1. Power off the analyzer and disconnect its power cord.

7-9
Optical System

2. Use the hexagon wrench to remove the screws fixing the forward middle low angle PD
assembly and remove the assembly from the optical support.
3. Use the cross-headed screwdriver to remove the two screws fixing the PD board and then
remove the shielding box from the forward middle low angle PD assembly.

Figure 7-11 Forward middle low angle PD assembly


1Shielding box 3PD
2High angle pre-amplification board 4PD cover

4. Use the cross-headed screwdriver to loosen the low angle pre-amplification board, remove
the PD cover and the PD board, replace the corresponding parts and install them orderly.
5. Assemble the shielding box to the forward middle low angle PD assembly and then install
the forward middle low angle PD assembly to the optical support.

Pre-amplification board
1. Power off the analyzer and disconnect its power cord.
2. Use the cross-headed screwdriver to loosen the two screws securing the PD board, and
remove the shielding box from the PD assembly.
3. Use the cross-headed screwdriver to remove the pre-amplification board from the PD
assembly and replace it with a new pre-amplification board, then reinstall it orderly.
Note: The rear light PD assembly needs not to be removed from the optical system during the
replacement of the pre-amplification board assembly.

7-10
Optical System

7.3 Adjustment
Any assembly in the optical system should be adjusted after the installation once it has been
disassembled. The adjustment procedure can be simplified according to how the assembly
has been disassembled.
The adjustment to the optical system consists of coarse adjustment and fine tuning. Coarse
adjustment roughly aligns every optical assembly and makes them approximately on the same
optical axis, so that the signal can be created rapidly when standard particles are run. Fine
tuning ensures the best position of the optical system. An oscilloscope is used to observe the
signal waveform and the corresponding optical assembly position is finely tuned so that the
signal generated meets the adjustment standard.

7.3.1 Coarse adjustment


According to each optical assembly, the coarse adjustment can be divided into: front light
assembly adjustment, flow cell adjustment, rear light collimator assembly adjustment, rear light
collector assembly diaphragm adjustment and backward detecting PD assembly adjustment.

Front light assembly adjustment

Purpose:
Horizontally, the beam is upright to the rear light collimator lens. The collimator emergent far
field spot is in the vertical direction.

Principle:
The laser beam distributes symmetrically along the optical axis; the reflex fully covers the
incident light when the light enters vertically.

Procedure:
Install the rear light assembly first, and cling the rear light assembly closely to the pin stop at
the rear light position, as Figure 7-12 shows. Aim the pin stop of the front light assembly at the
optical support, secure the fixing screw (make sure the forward optical system attaches the
optical support and is still movable). Turn on the power of the laser, and turn the laser
assembly to make the far field spot of the emitting laser vertical. Attach the rear light collimator
assembly to the pin stop, use a hexagon wrench to check whether the light reflected from the
surface of the rear light collimator lens is on the same axis with the incident light and slowly
turn the front light assembly to make them on the same axis, and then secure the assembly, as
Figure 7-13 shows.

7-11
Optical System

Figure 7-12 Rear light assembly installation

Figure 7-13 Front light assembly adjustment

7-12
Optical System

Flow cell adjustment

Purpose:
Adjusting the flow cell to irradiate the incident light to the surface of the flow cell vertically.

Principle:
That the flow cell is vertical to the incident laser uses the principle of that the reflex fully covers
the incident light when the light enters vertically.

Procedure:
Turn the flow cell into the optical path (do not position the square aperture detection area in the
optical path). Use a hexagon wrench to check whether the light reflected from the flow cell
surface is on the same axis with that of the incident light and adjust the flow cell slowly to
harmonize them and then secure the flow cell.

Figure 7-14 Flow cell coarse adjustment

Rear light collimator assembly adjustment

Rear light horizontal position adjustment


Purpose:
To make sure the front and the rear light is on the same axis approximately.

Principle:
The beam that goes through the main point of the lens will not change the transmitting
direction.

Procedure:
1. Remove the rear light collimator assembly; check whether the beam spot that passes
through the beam-splitting prism and the diaphragm on the MAS assembly is symmetrical.
Adjust the MAS assembly to make the beam spot symmetrical, as shown in Figure 7-15.

7-13
Optical System

Figure 7-15 Adjustment of the horizontal position of the rear light collimator assembly
2. Move horizontally the rear light collimator assembly along the pin stop and observe the
beam spot position on the diaphragm of the MAS assembly. When the spot is in the center
of the diaphragm (as shown in Figure 7-16), secure the fixing screw of the rear light
collimator assembly.

Figure 7-16 The adjustment of the horizontal position of the rear light collimator
assembly is finished

The rear light assembly must cling to the pin stop when it is moved.

Rear light collection assembly adjustment

LAS assembly diaphragm adjustment


Purpose:

7-14
Optical System

To obtain the effect of selecting low angle scattered light by positioning the LAS assembly
diaphragm symmetrically along the light axis.

Procedure:
1. Place a piece of white paper with rough surface at the back of the LAS assembly
diaphragm, and adjust the horizontal adjusting screw cap until the spot is symmetrical
horizontally (as shown in Figure 7-17).
2. Adjust the vertical adjusting screw cap until the spot is symmetrical vertically (as shown in
Figure 7-17).

Figure 7-17 Adjustment of the LAS assembly diaphragm


MAS assembly diaphragm adjustment
Purpose:
To obtain the effect of selecting middle low angle scattered light by positioning the MAS
assembly diaphragm symmetrically along the light axis.
Note: After the adjustment of the horizontal position of the rear light collimator assembly is
finished, the position adjustment of the MAS assembly diaphragm is finished. You can secure
the fixing screw.

Rear light detector assembly adjustment

Forward low angle PD assembly adjustment


Purpose:
To ensure the scattered light from the forward low angle is completely collected by the PD.

Procedure:
Adjust the horizontal and vertical positions of the forward low angle PD assembly until the
center of the spot emitted from the LAS assembly diaphragm is completely received by the

7-15
Optical System

aperture (as shown in Figure 7-18).

Figure 7-18 Adjustment of the forward low angle PD assembly


1Aperture diaphragm of eliminating 2Low angle beam spot
veiling glare

Forward middle low angle PD assembly adjustment


Adjust the forward middle low angle PD assembly in the same way as adjusting the forward
low angle PD assembly. Ensure that the center of the emitted spot is completely received by
the aperture (as shown in Figure 7-19).

Figure 7-19 Spot from the forward middle low angle PD assembly
1Aperture diaphragm of eliminating
veiling glare

The above description is a complete procedure of coarse adjustment. By the adjustment above,
each assembly is roughly positioned symmetrically along the light axis. The following
describes the fine tuning of the optical system.

7-16
Optical System

7.3.2 Preparation before fine tuning

Adjustment of the horizontal position of the flow cell

Before fine tuning, the detecting square aperture of the flow cell should be turned into the
optical path. Check the MAS assembly diaphragm. When the sideline shades of the square
aperture distribute symmetrically on the diaphragm, the flow cell is turned into the optical path,
as shown in Figure 7-20.

Figure 7-20 Flow cell position adjustment


1Flow cell horizontal adjusting knob

Adjustment of diaphragm against direct light

After the flow cell horizontal position adjustment is finished, turn the diaphragm against direct
light into the center of the optical path, so that the light intensity shielded by the diaphragm is
the largest and brightest. The following two methods show how to judge whether the
diaphragm is right in this position.

Visual check method:


Place a card (with a drawing line on it) on the MAS assembly diaphragm so that the two
sideline shades of the flow cell distribute symmetrically along the drawing line, as shown in
Figure 7-21. Adjust the position of the diaphragm against direct light. When the shielded spot
distributes symmetrically along the drawing line, the adjustment is finished.

7-17
Optical System

Figure 7-21 Visual check method


1Beam spot 3Drawing line
2Inner aperture of the flow cell 4High angle diaphragm

DC background method:
Output the pre-amplification board TPOUT test point of the forward low angle PD assembly (or
the TP43 LASIN test point connected to the signal processing board) to the oscilloscope and
select DC gear. Adjust the position of the diaphragm against direct light until minimum LAS DC
background is obtained, and then the adjustment is finished.
After the adjustment, secure the two screws of the diaphragm against direct light (as shown in
Figure 7-22).

Figure 7-22 Diaphragm against direct light


1Lock screw of the diaphragm
against direct light

7-18
Optical System

7.3.3 Fine tuning


The purpose of fine tuning is to ensure the optical system is in the optimal position when it
detects the scattered light signal from the designed angle. The fine tuning purpose mainly
consists of the following three parts: (1) to focus the laser on the cell flow; (2) To ensure that
the center of the sample flow basically covers the spot center; and (3) To adjust the scattered
light of the rear light assembly from the designed angle. Therefore, the tuning is mainly on the
forward optical system axial position, the flow cell horizontal position and the position of the
rear light collimator assembly.
Before the particle adjustment, at the Main Menu Setup Gain screen, set the
values of SS and FS to be 100.

Adjustment of front light assembly axial position

Purpose:
Ensure that the laser beam focus is on the cell flow.

Procedure:
1. Test the voltage of the tp2vref test point of the laser control board to see whether the
voltage reaches 4V. If not, adjust the variable resistance of the laser control board until the
voltage is 4V.
2. Output the pre-amplification board TPOUT test point of the forward low angle PD
assembly to the oscilloscope channel 1 (CH1), set the oscilloscope to be: voltage 50mv/div,
time 500ns/div and AC coupling.
3. Adopt standard particles as sample for test. Add 3 drops of Duke (4K-07) 7m standard
particles into a 1.5mL centrifugal tube, and then add diluent or deionized water into the
centrifugal tube to 1mL. Use the diluted standard particle solution within 3 hours.
4. Run the standard particles in the open-vial mode normally, check the signal in the
oscilloscope channel 1 and adjust the adjusting knob of the front light assembly (as shown
in Figure 7-23) in the axial position. When the maximum signal amplitude and stability is
obtained and distributes normally, the pulse width is the narrowest and about 1.3us, as
shown in Figure 7-24, secure the fixing screws of the front light guide assembly.

7-19
Optical System

Figure 7-23 Fine tuning of the front light axial position


1Front light axial adjustment knob 2laser axial adjustment lock screws

Figure 7-24 Standard particle signal graph output by forward optical system
Note: The sampling time of the DIFF channel is about 20s. To simplify the adjustment and
generate signals quickly, you can adjust the forward optical axis adjusting knob in advance
until the distance between the front end surface of the front light guide assembly and that of
the guide assembly support is about 4mm.

Fine tuning of the rear light collimator assembly

Purpose:
To ensure that what the PD assembly detects is the scattered light signals of the designed
collection angles.

Procedure:
1. Output the pre-amplification board TPOUT test point of the forward middle low angle PD

7-20
Optical System

assembly (or the TP44 MASIN test point connected to the signal processing board) to the
oscilloscope channel 2 (CH2), set the oscilloscope to: voltage 100mv/div, time 500ns/div
and AC coupling.
2. Run standard particles in the open vial mode normally, adjust the adjusting knob of the
rear light collimator assembly and check the signal pulses of the oscilloscope channel 2.
Secure the set screws of the rear light collimator assembly when the pulse peaks reach
the maximum value, the signal are stable and the shake is little.
3. Switch to the channel 1 (CH1) and check whether the signal peaks are 190mv10mv. If not,
adjust the adjustable resistance on the laser control board until the signal peaks of the
CH1 are 190mv10mv.
4. Check whether the signal peaks of the channel 2 (CH2) are about 800mv. If not, adjust the
adjusting knob of the rear light collimator assembly and confirm whether the pulse signal
peaks of the CH2 are at the maximum.

Fine tuning of the flow cell horizontal position

Purpose:
To ensure that the center of the sample flow is positioned in the center of the beam spot.

Procedure:
1. Run standard particles in the open vial mode, and check whether the signal peaks of the
oscilloscope channel 1 (CH1) are stable and shake little.
2. Adjust the flow cell horizontal position until the particle signal peaks displayed on the
oscilloscope are at the maximum and uniform.

Figure 7-25 Adjustment of the flow cell horizontal position


1Horizontal adjusting knob of the flow cell

7-21
Optical System

3. Step 3: After the test, standard particles scattergrams will be obtained, as shown in Figure
7-26:

Figure 7-26 Standard particles scattergrams

Click the Optical in the Review menu to enter the Optical screen (the default screen is
the DIFF channel calculation screen), then click Calculate to obtain the particle scattergram
parameters of the DIFF channel and then check whether the parameters meet the following
standards:
MAS 0.1max width < 12
LAS 0.1max width < 11

4. Step 4: When all the standard particle parameters meet the standards above, secure the
flow cell lock screws (as shown in Figure 7-27) and secure the protective cover of the
optical system.

Figure 7-27 the secured flow cell


1Lock screws of the flow cell

7-22
Optical System

Now, the adjustment of the optical system is finished.

7.3.4 Gain setup


After the optical system adjustment, you need to reset the DIFF channel gains. The gain setup
consists of two steps:

Standard particle calibration

At the count screen, ensure that the WBC background is under 0.1, and then run the 7 m
standard particles in the open vial mode normally. (If the WBC background exceeds the limit,
please clean the flow cell or do a background check).
After the test, Click the Optical in the Review menu to enter the Optical screen (the
default screen is the DIFF channel calculation screen), and then click Calculate to obtain the
particle scattergram parameters of the DIFF channel.

Figure 7-28 Optical system output standard particle signal

Enter into the Peak target boxes:


LAS 26
MAS 117
Calculate the gains, enter the gains into the corresponding boxes of the
MainSetupGain screen and save the results according to the prompt on the screen.
After the gain setup, retest the 7m standard particles to verify the gain. The gain of the DIFF
channel should be LAS 261 and MAS 1172.

Sample verification

After the above standard particle gain setup is finished, get several normal fresh blood
samples for test. The scattergram of a normal fresh blood sample should be like the images
shown in Figure 7-29:

7-23
Optical System

Figure 7-29 Scattergram of a normal fresh blood sample


If the WBC scattergram results of the normal fresh blood samples are significantly different
from the figure above, please check whether the reagents, reaction system and the fluidic
system work normally.

7-24
Optical System

7.4 Troubleshooting

7.4.1 Laser spot-deviation


The SS and FS gain setup is not changed during the use of the analyzer. Yet the scattergram
is compressed to the left down side, namely, the two signals collecting angle direction turn
smaller, as shown in Figure 7-30. This is mainly because the focusing spot at the flow cell
position move forward or backward, causing the diminishment of laser intensity.

Figure 7-30 Compressed scattergram

Settlement:
Make standard particle fist, and record the peak value position of standard particle. Loose the
laser axial adjustment lock screws (as shown in Figure 7-20). Turn the adjustment screw of
front light assembly counterclockwise for a quarter turn. Make standard particle and see the
peak value position. If the peak value position becomes greater, keep turning the adjustment
screw counterclockwise with 1/8 circle each time till the peak value position becomes smaller,
then turn back with 1/8 circle. If the peak value position becomes smaller, turn the adjustment
screw in the reverse order with the same method. After finding the maximum position of
standard particle, lock the laser axial adjustment fixing screws.

7.4.2 Flow cell clog


This is because a big blood clot or impurity blocks the flow cell or sampler inlet, which makes
the sheath flow unable to form. The scattergram is accordingly abnormal and scattered, as
Figure 7-31 shows.

7-25
Optical System

Figure 7-31 Scattered scattergram


Settlement:
Soak with dilute probe cleanser. If it does not work, replace the flow cell assembly.

7.4.3 Dirty flow cell


It can be classified into: dirty inner wall and dirty outer surface. Dirty outer surface might due to
the pollution from waste, and dirty inner wall is caused by the pollution of blood clot on the
inner wall of flow cell.
Settlement:
Dirty outer surface: wipe the outer surface gently with dustless cloth soaked in alcohol, and in
the same direction
Dirty inner wall: refer to the cleaning method for the inner wall of liquid flow cell.

7-26
8 Troubleshooting

8.1 Error code and information


Table 8-1 Error code and information
Error Code Error Name Error Code Error Name

0x01000100 Valve output failed 0x01000701 Driver board FPGA download


symbol error
0x01000101 Valve No. out of range 0x01000702 Driver board FPGA download
command error
0x01000201 Sampling assembly horizontal 0x01000703 Driver board FPGA load
motor failed to move to target address out of range
position
0x01000202 Sampling assembly horizontal 0x01000704 Drive board single data
motor failed to return to home written out of limit
position after initialization
0x01000203 Sampling assembly horizontal 0x01000705 Drive board data write out of
motor failed to leave home limit
position after initialization
0x01000204 Adjusting sampling assembly 0x01000706 Drive board write forbidden
horizontal motor to target
position failed
0x01000205 Adjusting sampling assembly 0x01000707 Drive board FPGA write
horizontal motor to home overtime
position failed
0x01000206 Adjusting sampling assembly 0x01000731 Drive board EEPROM write
horizontal motor to leave error
home position failed
0x01000207 Sampling assembly horizontal 0x01000801 Drive board functional code
motor adjustment error error
0x01000208 Sampling assembly horizontal 0x01000802 Drive board data length error
motor adjusting steps out of
limit
0x01000209 Sampling assembly horizontal 0x01000803 Drive board command label
motor adjusting end position error
error
0x01000211 Sampling assembly vertical 0x01000804 Drive board check code error

8-1
Troubleshooting

motor failed to move to target


position
0x01000212 Sampling assembly vertical 0x01000805 Drive board end code error
motor failed to initialize to
upper position
0x01000213 Sampling assembly vertical 0x01000806 Drive board identity code
motor failed to initialize to error
lower position
0x01000214 Adjusting sampling assembly 0x01000807 Sequence pack analysis busy
vertical motor to target
position failed
0x01000215 Adjusting sampling assembly 0x01000808 No complete sequence pack
vertical motor to upper
position failed
0x01000216 Adjusting sampling assembly 0x01000809 Sequence pack head frame
vertical motor to leave upper error
position failed
0x01000217 Sampling assembly vertical 0x01000810 Sequence pack start analysis
motor adjustment error number error
0x01000218 Sampling assembly vertical 0x01000811 Sequence pack total frames
motor adjusting steps out of error
limit
0x01000219 Sampling assembly vertical 0x01000812 Sequence pack save error
motor adjusting end position
error
0x01000220 Sampling assembly is working 0x01000813 Sequence pack end frame
error
0x01000221 Cannot adjust sampling 0x01000814 Sequence pack body frame
assembly error
0x01000222 Sampling assembly horizontal 0x01000815 Sequence pack frame order
motor action overtime error
0x01000223 Sampling assembly horizontal 0x01000816 Sequence pack execution
motor action forbidden overtime
0x01000224 Sampling assembly horizontal 0x01000817 None-sequence pack
motor does not match current analysis error
position
0x01000225 Sampling assembly vertical 0x01002000 Background abnormal
motor action overtime
0x01000226 Sampling assembly vertical 0x01002010 WBC count starts too slow

8-2
Troubleshooting

motor action forbidden


0x01000227 Sampling assembly vertical 0x01002011 WBC count time too long
motor mismatch current
position
0x01000228 Sampling assembly vertical 0x01002020 WBC count starts too fast
motor failed to pierce to lower
position
0x01000229 Sampling assembly vertical 0x01002021 WBC count time too short
motor failed to pierce to upper
position
0x01000230 Sampling assembly horizontal 0x01002022 WBC bubbles
motor photocoupler error
0x01000231 Sampling assembly RBC bath 0x01002030 RBC count starts slow
photocoupler error
0x01000232 Sampling assembly WBC 0x01002031 RBC count time too long
bath photocoupler error
0x01000233 Sampling assembly DIFF bath 0x01002040 RBC count starts too fast
photocoupler error.
0x01000234 Sample assembly vertical 0x01002041 RBC count time too short
motor photocoupler error
0x01000235 Sampling assembly upper 0x01002042 RBC bubbles
photocoupler error
0x01000236 Sampling assembly lower 0x01003000 Low vacuum
photocoupler error
0x01000300 Sampling syringe busy 0x01003001 High vacuum
0x01000301 Sampling syringe 0x01003010 Low pressure
photocoupler abnormal
0x01000302 Sampling syringe failed to 0x01003011 High pressure
return to home position after
action
0x01000303 Sampling syringe failed to 0x01003020 WBC volumetric tube filter
leave home position after clog
action
0x01000304 Sampling syringe failed to 0x01003021 RBC volumetric tube filter
return to home position before clog
action
0x01000305 Sampling syringe failed to 0x01003030 DIFF reaction bath temp.
leave home position before error
action

8-3
Troubleshooting

0x01000306 Sample syringe aspirate 0x01003031 Temperature out of working


volume over range range
0x01000307 Sample syringe dispense 0x01003032 Temperature out of operating
volume over range range
0x01000308 Sample syringe action 0x01003033 Optical system temp. error
overtime
0x01000310 Sample injection syringe busy 0x01003050 FS blank voltage abnormal
0x01000311 Sample injection syringe 0x01003060 HGB blank voltage abnormal
photocoupler abnormal
0x01000312 Sample injection syringe 0x01003061 Laser diode current abnormal
failed to return to home
position after action
0x01000313 Sample injection syringe 0x01003062 HGB channel error
failed to leave home position
after action
0x01000314 Sample injection syringe 0x01003070 Diluent expired
failed to return to home
position before action
0x01000315 Sample injection syringe 0x01003071 HGB Lyse expired
failed to leave home position
before action
0x01000316 Sample injection syringe 0x01003072 LEO(I) Lyse expired
aspirate volume over range
0x01000317 Sample injection syringe 0x01003073 LEO(II) Lyse expired
dispense volume over range
0x01000318 Sample injection syringe 0x01003074 Cleanser expired
action overtime
0x01000320 Sheath fluid syringe busy 0x01003080 No Diluent
0x01000321 Sheath fluid syringe 0x01003081 No LH lyse
photocoupler abnormal
0x01000322 Sheath fluid syringe failed to 0x01003082 No LEO(I) lyse
return to home position after
action
0x01000323 Sheath fluid syringe failed to 0x01003083 No LEO(II) lyse
leave home position after
action
0x01000324 Sheath fluid syringe failed to 0x01003084 No Cleanser
return to home position before
action

8-4
Troubleshooting

0x01000325 Sheath fluid syringe failed to 0x01003085 Waste is full


leave home position before
action
0x01000326 Sheath fluid syringe aspirate 0x01003090 Emptying WBC bath failed
volume out of range
0x01000327 Sheath fluid syringe dispense 0x01003091 Emptying RBC bath failed
volume out of range
0x01000328 Sheath fluid syringe action 0x010030A0 Constant current source 55V
overtime voltage abnormal
0x01000330 Lyse syringe busy 0x010030A1 +12V analogue voltage
abnormal
0x01000331 Lyse syringe photocoupler 0x010030A2 -12V analogue voltage
abnormal abnormal
0x01000332 Lyse syringe failed to return to 0x010030A3 Drive board 24V voltage
home position after action abnormal
0x01000333 Lyse syringe failed to leave 0x010030A4 Drive board 12V voltage
home position after action abnormal
0x01000334 Lyse syringe failed to return to 0x010030A5 Drive board 5V voltage
home position before action abnormal
0x01000335 Lyse syringe failed to leave 0x010030B0 Data board DDR abnormal
home position before action
0x01000336 Lyse syringe aspirate volume 0x010030B1 Data board FLEXBUS
out of range abnormal
0x01000337 Lyse syringe dispense volume 0x010030B2 Data board FLASH abnormal
out of range
0x01000338 Lyse syringe action overtime 0x010030B3 Data board AD7908
abnormal
0x01000340 Diluent syringe busy 0x010030B4 Data board AD7928
abnormal
0x01000341 Diluent syringe photocoupler 0x010030C0 Drive board communication
abnormal error
0x01000342 Diluent syringe failed to return 0x010030D0 Side door open
to home position after action
0x01000343 Diluent syringe failed to leave 0x010030D1 Optical assembly cover open
home position after action
0x01000344 Diluent syringe failed to return 0x010030D2 Sample compartment door
to home position before action open
0x01000345 Diluent syringe failed to leave 0x01004200 Software protocol resolution
home position before action

8-5
Troubleshooting

0x01000346 Diluent syringe aspirate 0x01004201 Response overtime


volume out of range
0x01000347 Diluent syringe dispense 0x01004202 Heartbeat disconnected
volume out of range
0x01000348 Diluent syringe action 0x01004401 DIFF data FIFO overflow
overtime
0x01000401 Optical system setting out of 0x01004402 DIFF data RAM overflow
limit
0x01000402 DIFF bath temperature setting 0x01004403 WBC data FIFO overflow
out of limit
0x01000601 Setting pressure failed 0x01004404 WBC data RAM overflow
0x01000602 Setting vacuum setting failed 0x01004405 RBC data FIFO overflow
0x01000603 Adjusting pressure chamber 0x01004406 RBC data RAM overflow
pressure failed
0x01000604 Adjusting vacuum chamber 0x01004407 PLT data FIFO overflow
vacuum failed
0x01000605 Pressure test failed 0x01004408 PLT data RAM overflow
0x01000606 Vacuum test failed 0x01004409 HGB data FIFO overflow
0x01000607 Pressure chamber pressure 0x0100440a HGB data RAM overflow
out of control limit
0x01000608 Vacuum chamber vacuum out 0x01004600 Analyzer communication
of control limit disconnected
0x01000611 Flow cell clog 0x01004601 Analyzer network
configuration fail

8-6
Troubleshooting

8.2 Errors indicated by error messages


When operating the analyzer, if error(s) is detected, the corresponding error message will be
displayed on the bottom of the screen. In the error message area, the severity levels are
discriminated from high to low by background colors, with red for the highest and green for the
lowest.
Click the error message on the screen and the corresponding help information will pop up. You
can click the "Remove error" button as instructed by the help information to remove the error,
or, remove some errors as instructed by the troubleshooting procedures of this manual.

8.2.1 Pressure errors

Table 8-2 Pressure errors


Error Message Description Possible causes
Setting pressure failed The pressure created in Pressure pump abnormal
the specified time can Tubing connects the pressure chamber
not meet the or pressure pump leaks
requirement. Pressure filter leaks
Pressure sensor abnormal, immoderate
error
Related detecting circuit abnormal
Setting vacuum setting The vacuum created in Vacuum pump abnormal
failed the specified time can Tubing connects the vacuum chamber or
not meet the vacuum pump leaks
requirement. Vacuum sensor abnormal, immoderate
error
Related detecting circuit abnormal

8.2.2 Reagent errors


Table 8-3 Reagent errors
Error Message Description Possible causes

No Diluent Diluent is used up or the The Diluent is used up.


sensor of the diluent pick up the sensor of the diluent pick up tube is
tube is connected connected improperly or damaged and
improperly. needs to be replaced.
No LH lyse LH lyse is used up or The LH lyse is used up.
excessive bubbles exist in LH lyse channel leaks, leading to
the LH lyse channel excessive bubbles.

8-7
Troubleshooting

No LEO(I) lyse LEO(I) lyse is used up or The LEO(I) lyse is used up.
excessive bubbles exist in LEO(I) lyse channel leaks, leading to
the LEO(I) lyse channel excessive bubbles.
No LEO(II) lyse LEO(II) lyse is used up or The LEO(II) lyse is used up.
excessive bubbles exist in LEO(II) lyse channel leaks, leading to
the LEO(II) lyse channel excessive bubbles.
No Cleanser Cleanser is used up or The cleanser is used up.
excessive bubbles exist in Cleanser channel leaks, leading to
the Cleanser channel excessive bubbles.
Waste is full The waste container is full Waste container is full.
or the sensor connecting the The sensor of the waste pick up tube is
waste container is connected improperly or damaged and
connected improperly needs to be replaced.
Diluent expired Diluent expired
Diluent expired
Exp. date setting is wrong
LEO(I) lyse expired LEO(I) Lyse expired
LEO(I) Lyse Expired
Exp. date setting is wrong
LEO(II) lyse expired LEO(II) Lyse expired
LEO(II) Lyse expired
Exp. date setting is wrong
LH lyse expired LH Lyse expired
LH Lyse expired
Exp. date setting is wrong
Cleanser expired Cleanser expired
Cleanser expired
Exp. date setting is wrong

8.2.3 Hardware errors


Refer to Chapter 5 Hardware System for how to troubleshoot each board.

8.2.4 Measurement errors

Table 8-4 Measurement errors


Error Message Description Possible causes
Background One or more 1. Bath, sample probe, probe wipe or aperture are
abnormal background contaminated.
results are out of 2. Diluent is expired or contaminated
the specified 3. Diluent tubing and back bath tubing leak,
range leading to excessive bubbles
4. Bubbles or clog is alarmed during the
background count.
5. Outside interference caused by poor shielding

8-8
Troubleshooting

LAS background Value is out of the 1. LAS voltage signal is improperly inducted.
voltage abnormal range of 0-400mv 2. Flow cell is contaminated.
3. Related detecting circuit abnormal
HGB background HGB background 1. No diluent in the WBC/HGB bath; HGB light is
voltage abnormal voltage is out of not turned on.
the range 2. WBC/HGB bath is contaminated.
[3.2,4.9]V 3. Reagent is expired or contaminated.
4. Improper HGB gain settings
5. HGB light assembly abnormal
6. Related detecting circuit abnormal
RBC clog RBC count time 1. Improper settings for reference count time and
too long start time.
RBC starts too 2. The bath is contaminated or the aperture is
slow clogged by impurity.
3. The photocoupler of the volumetric tube is
damaged.
4. Vacuum abnormal
5. Volumetric-tube-related tubing clogs.
6. Poor connections between the valves and the
driver board.
RBC bubbles RBC count time 1. Improper settings for reference count time and
too short start time.
RBC starts too fast 2. The photocoupler of the volumetric tube is
damaged.
3. Volumetric tube is dirty.
4. Bubbles exist at the tee connector of the
volumetric tube.
5. Fluidic error that leads to the failed emptying of
the volumetric tube.
6. Vacuum abnormal
7. Poor connections between the valves and the
driver board.
WBC clog WBC count time 1. Improper settings for reference count time and
too long start time.
WBC starts too 2. The bath is contaminated or the aperture is
slow clogged by impurity.
3. The photocoupler of the volumetric tube is
damaged.
4. Vacuum abnormal
5. Volumetric-tube-related tubing clogs.

8-9
Troubleshooting

6. Poor connections between the valves and the


driver board.
WBC bubbles WBC count time 1. Improper settings for reference count time and
too short start time.
WBC starts too 2. The photocoupler of the volumetric tube is
fast damaged.
3. Volumetric tube is dirty.
4. Bubbles exist at the tee connector of the
volumetric tube.
5. Fluidic error that leads to the failed emptying of
the volumetric tube.
6. Vacuum abnormal
7. Poor connections between the valves and the
driver board.

8.2.5 Temperature errors

Table 8-5 Temperature errors


Error Message Description Possible causes
Optical system Temperature value read The temperature transducer inner the optical
temp. error is out of the range of system error
[30, 40] . The heater inner the optical system error
DIFF reaction Reaction bath abnormal The bath temperature is out of the reference
bath temp. error or reaction bath range of 35-37. Please adjust the
temperature transducer temperature to meet the requirement.
error The temperature transducer of reaction bath is
damaged and needs to be replaced.
Ambient Ambient temperature The ambient temperature is out of the working
temperature out abnormal or ambient range of 15-30. Please adjust the
of working temperature transducer temperature to meet the requirement
range error The ambient temperature transducer is damaged
and needs to be replaced.
Ambient Ambient temperature The ambient temperature is out of the operating
temperature out abnormal or ambient range of 10-40. Please adjust the
of operating temperature transducer temperature to meet the requirement
range error The ambient temperature transducer is damaged
and needs to be replaced.

8-10
9 Appendixes

A. Accessories

A.1 Spare parts


No. Code/Model Name
1 0030-10-13064 Linear Stepping Motor 5V 1.8 degree
2 0033-20-74526 Dustproof cover for syringe
3 2000-20-03125 Ruby Red Cell Counter100um RB-22102
4 2100-10-08212 Fan cover. 80mm
5 2800-21-28878 Motor position sensor assembly
6 3001-10-07057 Volumetric tube
7 3001-10-07060 Micro-switch OMR0N D2SW-01H
8 3001-10-07252 Rotary diaphragm pump
9 3001-20-07263 Front bath washer (Mould WH02-205)
10 3001-20-18695 Fluorin rubber washer
11 115-002439-00 Filter of isolation chamber
12 3003-20-34955 Isolation chamber clamp
13 3003-21-34925 Motor position sensor assembly
14 3005-20-44746 Probe wipe clamp
15 3100-10-49438 Syringe Assembly100ul
16 3100-10-49442 Cytometer Cell
17 3100-20-41005 Sample probe
18 3101-10-69301 Syringe 250ul
19 3101-10-69302 Magnet OD12mm thickness 5mm
20 3101-20-68312 DIFF bath
21 3101-20-68315 Sample probe presser
22 3101-20-68347 Pressure chamber fixing plate
23 3101-20-68434 Bath insulation plate
24 3101-20-68436 Bath shielding cover
25 3101-20-68438 Circuit support
26 3101-20-68440 Circuit spacer
27 3101-20-68449 Shielding box of the measurement unit
28 3101-20-68488 Open vial sample probe
29 3101-20-68558 Pipe clamp of liquid-level board
30 3101-20-68559 Shielding cover of liquid-level board

A-1
Appendixes

31 043-000225-00 5300vet front cover


32 3101-20-68603 Jointed parts of the front cover
33 3101-20-68604 Indicator cover
34 3101-20-68711 Upper cover of the shielding box of data board
35 3101-20-68712 lower cover of the shielding box of data board
36 3102-20-69165 Air pressure chamber
37 M90-000144--- Foil. Copper foil belt, width 25mm, length 16.5m/roll UL certificated
38 M90-100032--- Syringe 2.5ml

A.2 Spare assemblies


No. Code/Model Name
1 0033-30-74627 10ml syringe assembly
2 0033-30-74628 Single syringe drive assembly
3 0033-30-74615 10ml syringe
4 3100-30-49554 Laser assembly
5 3100-30-49556 Front light assembly
6 3100-30-49557 Diaphragm lens assembly
7 3100-30-49559 Rear light assembly
8 3100-30-49560 Beam splitting assembly
9 3100-30-49561 Focusing lens assembly
10 3100-30-49567 Rectifier assembly
11 3100-30-49568 Flow cell assembly
12 3101-30-68320 WBC reaction bath assembly
13 3101-30-68337 Syringe assembly (100ul)
14 3101-30-68338 Syringe assembly (250ul)
15 3101-30-68339 Syringe assembly (2.5ml)
16 3101-30-68351 Waste pump assembly
17 3101-30-68532 Pressure chamber assembly
18 3101-30-68538 WBC assembly
19 3101-30-68542 RBC front/back bath assembly
20 3101-30-68540 Bath assembly
21 3101-30-68541 HGB support assembly
22 3101-30-68544 Power assembly
23 3101-30-68547 Vacuum chamber assembly
24 3101-30-68548 Belt-wheel-shaft assembly
25 3101-30-68549 Sample probe horizontal movement assembly
26 3101-30-68611 Relieve valve assembly
27 3101-30-68651 Optical system
28 3101-30-68662 LAS assembly
29 3101-30-68663 MAS assembly
30 3101-30-68664 Low angle PD assembly
31 3101-30-68665 High angle PD assembly
32 3101-30-68736 Operating software (for computer)
33 115-002661-00 3104 Operating software CD

A-2
Appendixes

34 115-002538-00 Diluent cap assembly


35 115-002540-00 LEO (I) Lyse cap assembly
36 3101-30-68766 LEO (II) Lyse cap assembly
37 115-002539-00 LH Lyse cap assembly
38 3101-30-68768 Cleanser cap assembly
39 3101-30-68776 Waste cap assembly

A.3 Spare pipes


No. Code/Model Name
1 0040-10-32301 Tubing.PTFE,.040""ID+/-.00
2 3001-10-07069 Tubing.1/16"X1/8",S-50-HLAAX02002,Tygon
3 A21-000002--- Tubing.Silicone,1/8"X1/4" X100ft,2800546-100
4 M6G-020006--- Tubing.Silicone,1/16""X3/1
5 M6G-020007--- Tubing OD3mm ID1mm EVA
6 M6G-020009--- Tubing. Silicone 0.031""ID
7 M90-000025--- Tubing.1/8""X1/4"",R-3603
8 M90-000026--- Tubing.PTFE,1/32""X1/16"",
9 M90-100031--- Tubing.Teflon,1.5mmX2.5mm,

A.4 Spare PCBA


No. Code/Model Name
1 3101-30-68501 Data board
2 3101-30-68503 Drive board
3 3101-30-68505 Mother board
4 3101-30-68507 Liquid-level board
5 3101-30-68509 Power board
6 3101-30-68511 Volumetric board
7 3101-30-68513 Laser control board
8 3101-30-68515 FS pre-amplification board
9 3101-30-68517 SS pre-amplification board
10 3101-30-68519 Indicator board

A.5 Spare cables


No. Code/Model Name
Network cable (for connection between the analyzer and the
1 009-000043-00 computer)
2 3100-20-49040 Connecting cable of Micro-switch
3 3101-20-68573 Connecting line of motor and sensor
4 3101-20-68574 Connecting cable of reagent sensor
5 3101-20-68575 Connecting cable of volumetric board
6 3101-20-68578 Connecting cable of power switch
7 3101-20-68581 Connecting cable of laser control
8 3101-20-68584 SS signal line

A-3
Appendixes

9 3101-20-68585 FS signal line


10 3101-20-68586 Connecting cable of switch control
11 3101-20-68589 Connecting cable from switch to power board
12 3101-20-68590 Power box fan and connecting cable
13 3101-20-68591 Outlet earth wire
14 3101-20-68592 Connecting cable of pump
15 3101-21-68588 Connecting cable of AC input
16 3101-21-68593 Connecting cable of laser
17 3101-30-68431 Connecting cable of indicator board
18 3102-20-69105 Connecting cable of DIFF bath

A.6 Spare connector


No. Code/Model Name
1 3001-10-07066 Tee connector T220/230-1
2 3102-20-69219 Waste tube connector
3 M90-100009--- Connector. Female Luer,Lug,Panel,1/4-28UNF,1/8"ID
Connector. Lock Nut, Panel Mount,1/4-28UNF,Orange
4 M90-100010--- Nylon
5 M90-100012--- Connector. Lock Nut, Panel Mount,1/4-28UNF,White Nylon
6 M90-100013--- Connector. Lock Nut, Panel Mount,1/4-28UNF,Black Nylon
7 M90-100015--- Lock Nut
8 M90-100016--- Connector. Lock Nut, Panel Mount,1/4-28UNF,Blue Nylon
Connector. Male Luer Lock Ring, For MTLP or
9 M90-100017--- LC23,Orange
10 M90-100019--- Connector. Male Luer Lock Ring, For MTLP or LC23,White
11 M90-100020--- Connector. Male Luer Lock Ring, For MTLP or LC23,Black
12 M90-100021--- Connector. Male Luer Lock Ring, For MTLP or LC23,Red
13 M90-100022--- Connector. Male Luer Lock Ring, For MTLP or LC23,Green
14 M90-100023--- Connector. Male Luer Lock Ring, For MTLP or LC23,Blue
15 M90-100024--- Connector. Male Luer,1/16"Barb,White Nylon,MTL210-1
16 M90-100025--- Connector. Male Luer,1/8"Barb,White Nylon,MTL230-1
17 M90-100028--- Connector.Tee,400Barb,3/32"ID,White Nylon
18 M90-100028-01 Connector. Straight Through,40 0Barb,3/32"ID,White
19 M90-100028-03 Connector.Y,400Barb,3/32"ID,White Nylon
20 M90-100030--- Connector.Y,200Barb,1/8"ID,White Nylon
21 M90-100046--- Connector. Coded Lock Ring, For FTLLB or FTLB, Orange
22 M90-100048--- Connector. Coded Lock Ring, For FTLLB or FTLB, White
23 M90-100049--- Connector. Coded Lock Ring, For FTLLB or FTLB, Black
24 M90-100051--- Connector. Coded Lock Ring, For FTLLB or FTLB, Green
25 M90-100052--- Connector. Coded Lock Ring, For FTLLB or FTLB, Blue

A-4
Appendixes

26 M90-100065--- Connector. Tee Reduction,400Barb,1/8"&3/32"ID,White


27 M90-100069--- Connector.Thread,10-32UNF,1/4"Hex,400Barb,3/32"ID

A.7 Consumable
No. Name Code/Model Package
Specifications
V-53LEO(I)
1 105-000152-00 350mLX4
Lyse(English/350mL*4)
V-53LEO(II)
2 105-000153-00 150mLX4
Lyse(English/150mL*4)
V-53LH
3 105-000154-00 180mLX4
Lyse(English/180mL*4)
V-53 CLEANSE(English
4 105-000155-00 850mLX4
/850mL*4)
V-53D Diluent (English
5 105-000146-00 10LX1
/10L)
V-53P Probe Cleanser
6 105-000151-00 50mLX1
(English /50mL)

A-5
B. List of Wearing Parts

No. Code/Model Name


1 3001-10-07054 Air Filter
2 3003-20-34941 Tee valve ASCO458284
3 3003-20-34942 Two-way valve ASCO458283
4 3006-20-74804 Probe Wipe
5 M07-00014S-00 VAL S305 07-Z030H 12VDC
6 M07-00076F--- FUSE Slow-Blow
7 M07-00077F--- FUSE Slow-Blow 125V 5A
8 M07-00079F--- FUSE Slow-Blow 125V 7A
9 M6G-020011--- Tubing.PharMed,1/16""ODX1/
10 0030-30-13197 Mini two-way electromagnetic valve (short line)
11 082-000027-00 Filter assembly

B-1
C. Fluidic diagram

C-1
D. Pump and Valve Function Table

D1. Valve Function Table


Two
No. Function
way/Tee
Provides fluid for the sample probe; V01 opens, the waste discharging
V01 3
path of the diluent syringe connects the sample probe.
Provides fluid for the probe wipe; V02 opens, the waste discharging
V02 3
path of the diluent syringe connects the inlet of the probe wipe.

V03 Aspirating/discharging switch of diluent syringe 3

Cleans the interior of the sample probe; V04 opens, the sample probe
V04 2
connects the sheath fluid syringe.
V05 Aspirating/discharging switch of LEO (I) lyse 3
V06 Aspirating/discharging switch of LEO (II) lyse 3
V07 Aspirating/discharging switch of LH lyse 3
Provides fluid for RBC bath; V08 opens, the waste discharging path of
V08 3
the diluent syringe connects the fluidic line of RBC bath
Opens and closes the pressure chamber and the waste outlet of the
V09 2
DIFF bath; bubbles the DIFF bath
Opens and closes the path between the vacuum chamber and the
V10 2
pressure chamber
Opens and closes the pressure chamber and the isolation chamber t of
V11 2
the RBC bath; bubbles the RBC bath
Opens and closes the pressure chamber and the isolation chamber t of
V12 2
the WBC bath; bubbles the WBC bath
Together with V33 and V29 to control the cleaning of the WBC back
V13 2
bath

V14 Together with V34 and V30 to control the cleaning of the RBC back bath 2

V15 Controls the aspiration of the cleanser 3


Opens and closes the sheath fluid syringe and the sample dispenseion
V21 2
syringe; assists the sheath fluid dispensing the sample
Opens and closes the sheath fluid syringe and DIFF bath; cleans DIFF
V22 2
bath
V23 Aspirating/discharging switch of sheath fluid syringe 3
Opens and closes the sheath fluid syringe and flow cell; dispenses
V24 2
sheath fluid
V25 Empties the WBC volumetric tube 2
V26 Empties the RBC volumetric tube 2

D-1
Appendixes

V27 Controls the waste discharging of the probe wipe 2


V28 Controls the waste discharging of the flow cell 2
V29 Controls the cleaning of the WBC back bath 3
V30 Controls the cleaning of the RBC back bath 3
V31 Empties the WBC volumetric tube 3
V32 Empties the RBC volumetric tube 3
V33 Controls the WBC counting 2
V34 Controls the RBC counting 2
V35 Controls the draining of the RBC bath 2
V36 Controls the draining of the WBC bath 2
V37 Controls the draining of the vacuum chamber 2
V38 Controls the draining of the DIFF bath 2
V39 Controls the preparation of the DIFF sample 2

D2. Pump function table


Name Function
Creates pressure in the pressure chamber, which is used to bubble and flash
P1
the aperture
Discharges the waste of the DIFF bath; empties and creates vacuum in the
P2 vacuum chamber to drive the counting by impedance method, clean the back
bath and drain the volumetric tube.
P3 Discharges the waste of the WBC bath, RBC bath and probe wipe

D3. Syringe function table


Name Function
Dispenses diluent into the WBC bath and RBC bath; cleans the sample
Diluent syringe
probe and dispenses fluid for the probe wipe
Prepares samples; forms sheath fluid; cleans the DIFF bath and the
Sheath syringe
sample preparation tubing
Aspiration Aspirates and dispenses samples
syringe
Sample syringe Dispenses the sample into the flow cell

Lyse-Syringe Aspirates and dispenses the LEO (I) Lyse, LEO (II) Lyse and LH Lyse

D-2
E. Tubing

E1. Fluidic connection drawing

E-1
Appendixes

E2. Tubing models

No. Material code Description characteristics


Thick 50 soft
1 M90-100071--- TYGON Tubing S-50-HL ID3/32' tube

2 3001-10-07069 Tubing.1/16"X1/8",S-50-HLAAX02002,Tygon Thin 50 soft tube


ID 1.5, thick,
4 M90-100031--- TEFLON TUBING ID1.5mm OD2.5mm 9023-14 Teflon tube
White thick
5 A21-000002--- Tubing.Silicone,1/8"X1/4"X100ft,2800546-100 silicon tube
Thick transparent
6 M90-000025--- TYGON R-3603 ID1/8' OD1/4' WALL1/16' soft tube
Tubing.Silicone,3/32"X7/32"X100ft,2800392-10
7 A21-000007--- 0 Thick silicon tube
Hard transparent
9 M6G-020005--- Hard tube ID=2mm,OD=3.6mm tube MPF300
Medium silicone
10 M6G-020006--- Tubing.Silicone,1/16"X3/16",TYGON 3350 tube
Teflon tube,
11 0040-10-32301 TEFLON TUBING ID 0.04' OD 1/16' ID=1, OD=1.6
Small silicone
12 M6G-020009--- Tubing. silicone 0.031"ID 0.156"OD 50ft/coil tube
Thin pinch tube,
14 M6G-020011--- Tubing.PharMed,1/16"ODX1/8"ID yellow
Teflon tube,
ID=0.7874,
18 M90-000026--- TEFLON .031ID X .062OD P/N,3000074-100 OD=1.6

19 M6G-020007--- Tubing OD3mm ID1mm EVA EVA Tubing

20 M6G-020034--- Tubing. Silicone, for PS pinch valve 1.6X3.2mm pinch tube, white

E-2
Appendixes

E3. Connectors

No. Code Model Material code Description characteristics


1 J4,J10,J36, J37 T210/220-1 Tee connector T Tee connector
with the smaller
two sides and
one larger end
2 J6,J7, J12 Y420-1 M90-100028-0 Connector. Y Tee Connector
3 Y,400Barb,3/32" medium
ID,White Nylon
3 J15 Y230-1 M90-100030--- Connector.Y,20 Y tee Connector
0Barb,1/8"ID,W large
hite Nylon
4 J9,J30,J31,J32 N420-1 M90-100028-0 Connector. I
,J38, J102, 1 Straight Connector-mediu
J107,J112 Through,400Bar m
b,3/32"ID,White
5 J13,J14,J16, N430/420-1 M90-100027--- Connector. I
J127 Straight Connector-large
Through medium
Reduction,1/8"&
3/32"ID
6 J35 T430/420-1 M90-100065--- Connector. Tee T Connector with
Reduction,400B the larger two
arb,1/8"&3/32"I sides and one
D medium end
7 J1,J2,J3,J5,J11 T420-1 M90-100028--- 3/32 PE TEE T
,J17,J18,J19,J FITTING-WHIT Connector-mediu
20,J21,J22,J24 E NYL T420-1 m
,J25,J27,J101,
J103,J104,
J113, J114
8 J100,J105,J10 L430/420-1 M90-100066--- Connector. L Connector
6 Elbow
Reduction,400B
arb,1/8"&3/32"I
D,White

E-3
Appendixes

9 J115, J120, Screw thread Used for


J121 connector connecting the
thin 50 tube and
Teflon tube
(ID=1.5mm)
10 J124, J125, Connector 2000-20-03314
J126, J128

E-4
Appendixes

E4. Tubing
Length
No. No. Material name (mm)

1 9-T1 Tubing. MPF Tube 2mmX3.5mm 610

2 9-T2 Tubing. MPF Tube 2mmX3.5mm 40

3 9-T3 Tubing. MPF Tube 2mmX3.5mm 820

4 9-T4 Tubing. MPF Tube 2mmX3.5mm 25

5 9-T5 Tubing. MPF Tube 2mmX3.5mm 150

6 9-T6 Tubing. MPF Tube 2mmX3.5mm 610

7 9-T7 Tubing. MPF Tube 2mmX3.5mm 800

8 9-T8 Tubing. MPF Tube 2mmX3.5mm 640

9 10-T9 Tubing. Silicone,1/16"X3/16",TYGON 3350 30

10 10-T11 Tubing. Silicone,1/16"X3/16",TYGON 3350 40

11 6-T15 Tubing. TYGON R-3603 ID1/8' OD1/4' WALL1/16' 100

12 4-T16 Tubing. Teflon,1.5mmX2.5mm,9023-14 720

13 4-T17 Tubing. Teflon,1.5mmX2.5mm,9023-14 870

14 4-T18 Tubing. Teflon,1.5mmX2.5mm,9023-14 910

15 4-T19 Tubing. Teflon,1.5mmX2.5mm,9023-14 250

16 9-T20 Tubing. MPF Tube 2mmX3.5mm 70

17 4-T21 Tubing. Teflon,1.5mmX2.5mm,9023-14 260

18 2-T22 Tubing. 1/16"X1/8",S-50-HLAAX02002,Tygon 70

19 2-T23 Tubing.1/16"X1/8",S-50-HLAAX02002,Tygon 70

*20 4-T24 Tubing.Teflon,1.5mmX2.5mm,9023-14 1200

21 1-T25 Tubing.3/32"X5/32",S-50-HLAAX02004,Tygon 280

22 9-T30 Tubing. MPF Tube 2mmX3.5mm 25

23 9-T31 Tubing. MPF Tube 2mmX3.5mm 80

24 9-T32 Tubing. MPF Tube 2mmX3.5mm 60

E-5
Appendixes

25 9-T33 Tubing. MPF Tube 2mmX3.5mm 60

26 2-T34 Tubing.1/16"X1/8",S-50-HLAAX02002,Tygon 1110

27 4-T35 Tubing.Teflon,1.5mmX2.5mm,9023-14 240

28 9-T36 Tubing. MPF Tube 2mmX3.5mm 230

29 2-T37 Tubing.1/16"X1/8",S-50-HLAAX02002,Tygon 25

30 2-T38 Tubing.1/16"X1/8",S-50-HLAAX02002,Tygon 1010

31 1-T39 Tubing.3/32"X5/32",S-50-HLAAX02004,Tygon 20

32 2-T40 Tubing.1/16"X1/8",S-50-HLAAX02002,Tygon 250

33 9-T41 Tubing. MPF Tube 2mmX3.5mm 20

34 2-T42 Tubing.1/16"X1/8",S-50-HLAAX02002,Tygon 25

35 2-T43 Tubing.1/16"X1/8",S-50-HLAAX02002,Tygon 1100

36 1-T44 Tubing.3/32"X5/32",S-50-HLAAX02004,Tygon 20

37 2-T45 Tubing.1/16"X1/8",S-50-HLAAX02002,Tygon 630

38 2-T46 Tubing.1/16"X1/8",S-50-HLAAX02002,Tygon 950

39 2-T47 Tubing.1/16"X1/8",S-50-HLAAX02002,Tygon 850

40 1-T48 Tubing.3/32"X5/32",S-50-HLAAX02004,Tygon 140

41 1-T49 Tubing.3/32"X5/32",S-50-HLAAX02004,Tygon 490

42 9-T50 Tubing.MPF Tube 2mmX3.5mm 190

43 2-T51 Tubing.1/16"X1/8",S-50-HLAAX02002,Tygon 610

44 1-T52 Tubing.3/32"X5/32",S-50-HLAAX02004,Tygon 30

45 1-T53 Tubing.3/32"X5/32",S-50-HLAAX02004,Tygon 30

46 9-T58 Tubing.MPF Tube 2mmX3.5mm 200

47 9-T60 Tubing.MPF Tube 2mmX3.5mm 120

*48 9-T62 Tubing.MPF Tube 2mmX3.5mm 40

49 12-T63 Tubing.Silicone 0.031"ID 0.156"OD 50ft/coil 20

*50 18-T64 Tubing.Teflon,0.8mm 350

51 9-T65 Tubing.MPF Tube 2mmX3.5mm 25

E-6
Appendixes

*52 9-T66 Tubing.MPF Tube 2mmX3.5mm 20

53 9-T68 Tubing. MPF Tube 2mmX3.5mm 25

*54 2-T69 Tubing.1/16"X1/8",S-50-HLAAX02002,Tygon 40

*55 9-T70 Tubing. MPF Tube 2mmX3.5mm 40

*56 4-T71 Tubing.Teflon,1.5mmX2.5mm,9023-14 1000

*57 12-T72 Tubing. Silicone 0.031"ID 0.156"OD 50ft/coil 20

58 18-T73 Tubing.Teflon,0.8mm 1030

*59 12-T74 Tubing. Silicone 0.031"ID 0.156"OD 50ft/coil 20

60 11-T75 Tubing.Teflon,1.0mm 430

*61 12-T76 Tubing. Silicone 0.031"ID 0.156"OD 50ft/coil 20

62 2-T77 Tubing.1/16"X1/8",S-50-HLAAX02002,Tygon 30

63 2-T78 Tubing.1/16"X1/8",S-50-HLAAX02002,Tygon 15

*64 4-T79 Tubing.Teflon,1.5mmX2.5mm,9023-14 1000

65 12-T80 Tubing. Silicone 0.031"ID 0.156"OD 50ft/coil 20

*66 4-T81 Tubing.Teflon,1.5mmX2.5mm,9023-14 900

67 19-T84 Sampling Tube, EVA Tubing 1000

68 11-T85 Tubing.Teflon,1.0mm 740

*69 11-T86 Tubing.Teflon,1.0mm 300

*70 11-T87 Tubing.Teflon,1.0mm 500

71 1-T88 Tubing.3/32"X5/32",S-50-HLAAX02004,Tygon 720

72 1-T89 Tubing.3/32"X5/32",S-50-HLAAX02004,Tygon 630

73 10-T90 Tubing.Silicone,1/16"X3/16",TYGON 3350 20

74 2-T92 Tubing.1/16"X1/8",S-50-HLAAX02002,Tygon 20

75 9-T93 Tubing. MPF Tube 2mmX3.5mm 125

76 9-T94 Tubing. MPF Tube 2mmX3.5mm 125

77 2-T95 Tubing.1/16"X1/8",S-50-HLAAX02002,Tygon 260

*78 2-T96 Tubing.1/16"X1/8",S-50-HLAAX02002,Tygon 260

E-7
Appendixes

79 5-T97 Tubing. SILCON 2800546-100 ID=0.125'OD=0.250' 22

80 5-T98 Tubing. SILCON 2800546-100 ID=0.125'OD=0.250' 22

81 2-T99 Tubing.1/16"X1/8",S-50-HLAAX02002,Tygon 15

82 2-T100 Tubing.1/16"X1/8",S-50-HLAAX02002,Tygon 15

83 1-T101 Tubing.3/32"X5/32",S-50-HLAAX02004,Tygon 15

84 1-T102 Tubing.3/32"X5/32",S-50-HLAAX02005,Tygon 15

85 1-T103 Tubing.3/32"X5/32",S-50-HLAAX02006,Tygon 15

86 1-T104 Tubing.3/32"X5/32",S-50-HLAAX02007,Tygon 15

87 2-T105 Tubing.1/16"X1/8",S-50-HLAAX02002,Tygon 20

88 9-T107 Tubing. MPF Tube 2mmX3.5mm 70

89 6-T108 Tubing. TYGON R-3603 ID1/8' OD1/4' WALL1/16' 20

90 9-T109 Tubing. MPF Tube 2mmX3.5mm 70

91 6-T110 Tubing. TYGON R-3603 ID1/8' OD1/4' WALL1/16' 20

92 1-T111 Tubing.3/32"X5/32",S-50-HLAAX02004,Tygon 170

93 2-T112 Tubing.1/16"X1/8",S-50-HLAAX02002,Tygon 110

94 2-T113 Tubing.1/16"X1/8",S-50-HLAAX02002,Tygon 110

*95 2-T114 Tubing.1/16"X1/8",S-50-HLAAX02002,Tygon 150

*96 2-T115 Tubing.1/16"X1/8",S-50-HLAAX02002,Tygon 150

97 1-T116 Tubing.3/32"X5/32",S-50-HLAAX02004,Tygon 180

98 1-T117 Tubing.3/32"X5/32",S-50-HLAAX02004,Tygon 15

*99 2-T118 Tubing.1/16"X1/8",S-50-HLAAX02002,Tygon 610

*100 2-T119 Tubing.1/16"X1/8",S-50-HLAAX02002,Tygon 390

101 1-T120 Tubing.3/32"X5/32",S-50-HLAAX02004,Tygon 100

102 1-T121 Tubing.3/32"X5/32",S-50-HLAAX02004,Tygon 200

103 1-T122 Tubing.3/32"X5/32",S-50-HLAAX02004,Tygon 25

104 1-T123 Tubing.3/32"X5/32",S-50-HLAAX02004,Tygon 60

105 1-T124 Tubing.3/32"X5/32",S-50-HLAAX02004,Tygon 25

E-8
Appendixes

106 1-T125 Tubing.3/32"X5/32",S-50-HLAAX02004,Tygon 40

107 1-T126 Tubing.3/32"X5/32",S-50-HLAAX02004,Tygon 25

108 4-T127 Tubing.Teflon,1.5mmX2.5mm,9023-14 50

109 1-T128 Tubing.3/32"X5/32",S-50-HLAAX02004,Tygon 60

110 6-T129 Tubing. TYGON R-3603 ID1/8' OD1/4' WALL1/16' 110

111 6-T130 Tubing. TYGON R-3603 ID1/8' OD1/4' WALL1/16' 180

112 6-T131 Tubing. TYGON R-3603 ID1/8' OD1/4' WALL1/16' 100

113 6-T132 Tubing. TYGON R-3603 ID1/8' OD1/4' WALL1/16' 40

114 6-T133 Tubing. TYGON R-3603 ID1/8' OD1/4' WALL1/16' 40

115 6-T134 Tubing. TYGON R-3603 ID1/8' OD1/4' WALL1/16' 70

116 12-T135 Tubing.Silicone 0.031"ID 0.156"OD 50ft/coil 20

117 12-T136 Tubing.Silicone 0.031"ID 0.156"OD 50ft/coil 20


Tubing.Silicone, for PS pinch valve 1.6X3.2mm, Pinch Tube
118 20-T139 M6G-020034 40

*119 11-T140 Tubing.Teflon,1.0mm 80

*120 12-T141 Tubing.Silicone 0.031"ID 0.156"OD 50ft/coil 20

121 12-T142 Tubing.Silicone 0.031"ID 0.156"OD 51ft/coil 20

122 11-T145 Tubing.Teflon,1.0mm 15

123 11-T146 Tubing.Teflon,1.0mm 80

124 2-T147 Tubing.1/16"X1/8",S-50-HLAAX02002,Tygon 20

~125 2-T148 Tubing.1/16"X1/8",S-50-HLAAX02002,Tygon 450

126 2-T149 Tubing.1/16"X1/8",S-50-HLAAX02002,Tygon 420

~127 6-T150 Tubing. TYGON R-3603 ID1/8' OD1/4' WALL1/16' 110

~128 1-T121 Tubing.3/32"X5/32",S-50-HLAAX02004,Tygon 200

129 12-T151 Tubing.Silicone 0.031"ID 0.156"OD 50ft/coil 20

130 12-T152 Tubing.Silicone 0.031"ID 0.156"OD 50ft/coil 20

131 1-T153 Tubing.3/32"X5/32",S-50-HLAAX02004,Tygon 60

132 7-T154 Tubing.Silicone,3/32"X7/32"X100ft,2800392-100 80

E-9
Appendixes

~133 2-T155 Tubing.1/16"X1/8",S-50-HLAAX02002,Tygon 60

~134 2-T156 Tubing.1/16"X1/8",S-50-HLAAX02002,Tygon 60

135 12-T157 Tubing.Silicone 0.031"ID 0.156"OD 50ft/coil 20

136 2-T161 Tubing.1/16"X1/8",S-50-HLAAX02002,Tygon 20

137 14-T164 Pinch TubeTubing.PharMed,1/16"ODX1/8"ID 70

138 4-T167 Tubing.Teflon,1.5mmX2.5mm,9023-14 220

139 2-T168 Tubing.1/16"X1/8",S-50-HLAAX02002,Tygon 20

140 2-T169 Tubing.1/16"X1/8",S-50-HLAAX02002,Tygon 20

141 12-T170 Tubing.Silicone 0.031"ID 0.156"OD 50ft/coil 20

142 11-T171 Tubing.Teflon,1.0mm 240

143 12-T173 Tubing.Silicone 0.031"ID 0.156"OD 50ft/coil 20

144 11-T174 Tubing.Teflon,1.0mm 170

145 10-T175 Tubing.Silicone,1/16"X3/16",TYGON 3350 20

146 11-T177 Tubing.Teflon,1.0mm 120

147 12-T178 Tubing.Silicone 0.031"ID 0.156"OD 50ft/coil 20

148 11-T180 Tubing.Teflon,1.0mm 100

149 12-T181 Tubing.Silicone 0.031"ID 0.156"OD 50ft/coil 20

150 12-T182 Tubing.Silicone 0.031"ID 0.156"OD 50ft/coil 20

151 12-T183 Tubing.Silicone 0.031"ID 0.156"OD 50ft/coil 20

152 12-T184 Tubing.Silicone 0.031"ID 0.156"OD 50ft/coil 20

153 12-T185 Tubing.Silicone 0.031"ID 0.156"OD 50ft/coil 20

154 10-T186 Tubing.Silicone,1/16"X3/16",TYGON 3350 20

155 10-T187 Tubing.Silicone,1/16"X3/16",TYGON 3350 20

156 1-T188 Tubing.3/32"X5/32",S-50-HLAAX02004,Tygon 250

157 10-T189 Tubing.Silicone,1/16"X3/16",TYGON 3350 20

158 10-T190 Tubing.Silicone,1/16"X3/16",TYGON 3350 20

159 4-T191 Tubing.Teflon,1.5mmX2.5mm,9023-14 55

E-10
Appendixes

160 2-T192 Tubing.1/16"X1/8",S-50-HLAAX02002,Tygon 20

161 2-T193 Tubing.1/16"X1/8",S-50-HLAAX02002,Tygon 20

162 2-T194 Tubing.1/16"X1/8",S-50-HLAAX02002,Tygon 20

163 2-T195 Tubing.1/16"X1/8",S-50-HLAAX02002,Tygon 15

164 9-T196 Tubing.MPF Tube 2mmX3.5mm 40

165 2-T197 Tubing.1/16"X1/8",S-50-HLAAX02002,Tygon 15

166 2-T198 Tubing.1/16"X1/8",S-50-HLAAX02002,Tygon 15

167 1-T199 Tubing.3/32"X5/32",S-50-HLAAX02004,Tygon 15

168 1-T206 Tubing.3/32"X5/32",S-50-HLAAX02004,Tygon 22

169 4-T207 Tubing.Teflon,1.5mmX2.5mm,9023-14 160

170 1-T208 Tubing.3/32"X5/32",S-50-HLAAX02004,Tygon 28

171 1-T209 Tubing.3/32"X5/32",S-50-HLAAX02004,Tygon 70

172 4-T210 Tubing.Teflon,1.5mmX2.5mm,9023-14 130

173 1-T211 Tubing.3/32"X5/32",S-50-HLAAX02004,Tygon 40

174 5-T212 Tubing.Silicone,1/16"X3/16",TYGON 3350 40

175 2-T213 Tubing.1/16"X1/8",S-50-HLAAX02002,Tygon 25

176 2-T214 Tubing.1/16"X1/8",S-50-HLAAX02002,Tygon 25

177 2-T215 Tubing.1/16"X1/8",S-50-HLAAX02002,Tygon 850

178 2-T216 Tubing.1/16"X1/8",S-50-HLAAX02002,Tygon 850

179 2-T217 Tubing.1/16"X1/8",S-50-HLAAX02002,Tygon 850

180 2-T218 Tubing.1/16"X1/8",S-50-HLAAX02002,Tygon 850

181 6-T219 Tubing. TYGON R-3603 ID1/8' OD1/4' WALL1/16' 1500

182 6-T220 Tubing. TYGON R-3603 ID1/8' OD1/4' WALL1/16' 1500

183 5-T221 Tubing.Silicone,1/8"X1/4"X100ft,2800546-100 180

184 5-T222 Tubing.Silicone,1/8"X1/4"X100ft,2800546-100 180

185 5-T223 Tubing.Silicone,1/8"X1/4"X100ft,2800546-100 180

186 5-T224 Tubing.Silicone,1/8"X1/4"X100ft,2800546-100 180

E-11
Appendixes

187 6-T225 Tubing. TYGON R-3603 ID1/8' OD1/4' WALL1/16' 270

188 11-T226 Tubing.Teflon,1mm 500

189 12-T227 Tubing.Silicone 0.031"ID 0.156"OD 50ft/coil 20

190 11-T228 Tubing.Teflon,1mm 60

191 12-T229 Tubing.Silicone 0.031"ID 0.156"OD 50ft/coil 20

192 1-T230 Tubing.3/32"X5/32",S-50-HLAAX02004,Tygon 280

193 1-T231 Tubing.3/32"X5/32",S-50-HLAAX02004,Tygon 480

194 2-T232 Tubing.1/16"X1/8",S-50-HLAAX02002,Tygon 40

195 2-T233 Tubing.1/16"X1/8",S-50-HLAAX02002,Tygon 40

196 2-T234 Tubing.1/16"X1/8",S-50-HLAAX02002,Tygon 20

197 4-T235 Tubing.Teflon,1.5mmX2.5mm,9023-14 80

198 2-T236 Tubing.1/16"X1/8",S-50-HLAAX02002,Tygon 50

199 2-T237 Tubing.1/16"X1/8",S-50-HLAAX02002,Tygon 25

200 2-T238 Tubing.1/16"X1/8",S-50-HLAAX02002,Tygon 20

201 4-T239 Tubing.Teflon,1.5mmX2.5mm,9023-14 110

202 2-T240 Tubing.1/16"X1/8",S-50-HLAAX02002,Tygon 50

203 2-T241 Tubing.1/16"X1/8",S-50-HLAAX02002,Tygon 25

204 2-T242 Tubing.1/16"X1/8",S-50-HLAAX02002,Tygon 25

205 2-T243 Tubing.1/16"X1/8",S-50-HLAAX02002,Tygon 20

206 2-T244 Tubing.1/16"X1/8",S-50-HLAAX02002,Tygon 20

207 4-T245 Tubing.Teflon,1.5mmX2.5mm,9023-14 90

208 2-T246 Tubing.1/16"X1/8",S-50-HLAAX02002,Tygon 50

209 2-T247 Tubing.1/16"X1/8",S-50-HLAAX02002,Tygon 25

210 2-T248 Tubing.1/16"X1/8",S-50-HLAAX02002,Tygon 25

211 2-T249 Tubing.1/16"X1/8",S-50-HLAAX02002,Tygon 20

212 12-T250 Tubing.Silicone 0.031"ID 0.156"OD 50ft/coil 20

213 12-T251 Tubing.Silicone 0.031"ID 0.156"OD 50ft/coil 20

E-12
Appendixes

214 10-T252 Tubing.Silicone,1/16"X3/16",TYGON 3350 6

215 10-T253 Tubing.Silicone,1/16"X3/16",TYGON 3350 6

E-13
F. Error Module and the Classified Errors

Technical Error
No. Error code Classified errors
field module

Mechanism 1.1 sample probe corroded

1.2 Probe wipe leaks

1.3 Motor error

1.4 Photocoupler error


Sample 1.5 Sample probe Initialization error
1 probe
1.6 Probe wipe leaks
assembly
1.7 Tube jammed (Tank chain damaged)

Sample probe assembly abnormal sound (belt is too


1.8
tight)
Sample probe assembly abnormal sound (belt is too
1.9
loose)

2.1 Motor error

2.2 Photocoupler error

2.3 Too noisy during action


Syringe Frequent motor error reported with normal self-test
2 2.4
assembly result

2.5 Syringe leaks

2.6 Syringe initialization error reported

2.7 Syringe broken

3.1 Motor error

3.2 Photocoupler error

3.3 Too noisy during action


12.5ml Frequent motor error reported with normal self-test
3.4
3 syringe result
assembly
3.5 Syringe leaks

3.6 12.5ml syringe initialization error reported

Lead screws gap is too wide, which leads to incorrect


3.7
metering
4 Relieve 4.1 Flow cell error is reported erroneously

F-1
Appendixes

valve 4.2 Relieve valve can not work


assembly
4.3 Leakage

4.4 Photocoupler error

4.5 Spring rusty

Diluent 5.1 Too much reagent remained


5
assembly 5.2 No diluent is reported erroneously

Waste
6 6.1 Waste full is reported erroneously
assembly

7.1 Front cover broken

7.2 Side door can not be closed firmly

7.3 Right side door open is reported erroneously

7.4 Aspirate key is damaged and can not work


Other
mechanis 7.5 Metal tube passing fluid is rusty

m 7.6 Printing is easily wiped off


7
compone
7.7 Heat insulator of the DIFF bath is broken off
nts
Pressure/vacuum abnormal is reported
damaged 7.8
(pressure/vacuum chamber leaks)
The gaps between the side door and the front
cover/the side door and the top cover are too
7.9
wide.(the magnet on the front cover can not attract
the side door firmly)
Hardware 8 Wiring 8.1 Valves and pumps can not work

9.1 Indicator doesn't work


9 Indicator
9.2 Buzzer doesnt sound when error occurs

10.1 Syringe doesnt work

Ambient temperature abnormal is reported


10.2
erroneously

10.3 Motor error is reported


Drive
10
board 10.4 Valves do not work

10.5 Pumps do not work

10.6 Pressure abnormal is reported

10.7 Valves and pumps keep working and hot

11 Volumetri 11.2 Count time too long is reported

F-2
Appendixes

c board 11.3 Count time too long is reported

12.1 Abnormal background, too high

12.2 Can not start up the analyzer

Data 12.3 Analyzer crashes down frequently


12
board 12.4 No HGB report; HGB blank voltage too low

12.5 Analysis results are displayed in *

12.6 Can not start up the analyzer normally

Power
13 13.7 Power-fail, can not start up the analyzer normally
board

Liquid-lev 14.8 No reagent is reported when there is sufficient.


14
el board 14.9 No error is reported when there is no reagent

pre-ampli 15.1 No scattergram; no WBC differential


fication
15 board
15.2 Scattergram is compressed horizontally
(high-ang
el)
pre-ampli 16.1 No scattergram; no WBC differential
fication
16 board
16.2 Scattergram is compressed vertically
(low-ang
el)
Laser 17.1 Scattergram is compressed horizontally and vertically
17 control
17.2 No scattergram
board

18.1 Analyzer can not start up after switching on

Other Analyzer can not run samples after pressing the


18.2
hardware aspirate key
18
compone 18.3 Temperature abnormal is reported
nts 18.4 Temperature switch is damaged

18.5 No diluent or waste full is reported erroneously

Fluidics 19.1 Valve leaks


Two-way
19.2 Valve response time too long
19 ASCO
19.3 Valve flow small
valve
19.4 Valve does not work

F-3
Appendixes

20.1 Valve leaks


Tee
20.2 Valve response time too long
20 ASCO
20.3 Valve flow small
valve
20.4 Valve does not work

Pinch 21.1 Pinch valve can not pinch firmly


21
valve Pinch valve doesnt work
21.2

Fluidic 22.1 Discharge volume small


22
pumps 22.2 Pumps do not work

Air 23.1 Creating pressure time too long


23
pumps 23.2 Pumps do not work

24 Air Filter 24.1 Pressure abnormal

Check
25
valve 25.1 Liquid in the DIFF bath spills
26.1 Tubing broken off or leaks

26.2 Part of the tubing is not well cleaned

26.3 Bended and clogged tubing

26.4 Flow cell clog

Liquid hangs on the interior wall of the dispensing


26.5
Fluidic tube
26
System 26.6 Sample probe is not well cleaned

26.7 Liquid hangs on the tip of the sample probe

26.8 DIFF bath is not well cleaned

26.9 Flow cell interior wall is dirty

26.10 Flow cell waste outlet overflows

26.11 Filter clogs

27.1 Abnormal background; cleaning is not well done


Bath
27 27.2 Instable HGB blank voltage
assembly
27.3 WBC clog

Control unit is busy and can not respond the current


Software 28 Software 28.1
command

28.2 System crashes down

28.3 Cooperation problem between hardware and

F-4
Appendixes

software

28.4 Data changed or lost

28.5 Print format failed to meet the requirement

28.6 Can not enter the system after starting up

28.7 Software operation is slow

28.8 Management software error

Optical
Standard scattergram and normal patient samples
Optical 29 system 29.1
abnormal (except flow cell dirty)
assembly
Replacing the component when the error can hardly
Others 30 Others be identified, but the replaced component can work
30.1 normally.

F-5
G. Maintenance Module and the Corresponding
Settings

No. Type Maintenance Settings to be reset


Re-adjust the position of the sampling assembly
Replace the drive board
1 by software
Re-adjust the gains, calibration factors and
Replace the data board
2 Boards count-related settings

Replace the power board


3 Re-conduct the safety test
4 Replace the volumetric board Reset the count time and the start signal delay
1. Re-adjust the position of the sampling
Disassemble and assemble the assembly to the DIFF bath.
DIFF bath assembly or have it 2. If the temperature and the mixing are greatly
upgraded changed, then re-adjusting the optical gain is
5 necessary.
Remove the DIFF bath assembly
from the analyzer and then Re-adjust the position of the sampling assembly
6 re-assemble it to the DIFF bath by software
Mechanism 1. Manually adjust the horizontal position of the
Replace and
mix assembly.
disassemble/assemble the front
2. Re-adjust the position of the clipper by
cover
7 software.
1. Manually adjust the horizontal position of the
Replace and sample feeding assembly.
disassemble/assemble the 2. Re-adjust the position of the sampling
bottom cover assembly to the sample compartment and the
8 autoloading position by software.
1. Re-adjust the gains and the calibration factors.
Replace the aperture
9 2. Reset the count time and the start signal delay.
1. Re-adjust the gains and the calibration factors.
Replace the bath
10 2. Reset the count time and the start signal delay.
Baths
1. Re-enter the volume of the volumetric tube at
Replace the volumetric tube the setting screen.
11 2. Reset the count time and the start signal delay.
12 Replace HGB Re-adjust the gain and calibration of HGB.
The vacuum created in the
Sequence
13 sequence is changed Reset the count time and the start signal delay

G-1
Appendixes

Sample results are changed


14 greatly Re-adjust the gain and the calibration.

G-2
H. Method to identify cross network cable and
direct-connected network cable
H.1 Identify cross network cable
1. With the metal contactors side up, mark the 8 lines in the connector from left to right with 1-8.
Accordingly, the colors of the lines are: white and orange, orange, white and green, blue, white
and blue, green, white and brown, and brown.

Connector of the network cable

2. Define one end of the cable to be A randomly. Then, the other end is B. way to connect the
end A and B is shown in the Figure below.

End A and End B


End Awhite and green, green, white and orange, blue, white and blue, orange, white and
brown, and brown 1 and 3 is exchanged; 2 and 6 is exchanged
End Bwhite and orange, orange, white and green, blue, white and blue, green, white and
brown, and brown

H.2 Identify direct-connected network cable


1. With the metal contactors side up, mark the 8 lines in the connector from left to right with 1-8.
Accordingly, the colors of the lines are: white and orange, orange, white and green, blue, white
and blue, green, white and brown, and brown.

H-1
Appendixes

Connector of the direct-connected network cable


2. Define one end of the cable to be A randomly. Then, the other end is B. way to connect the
end A and B is shown in the Figure below.

End A and End B of the direct-connected network cable


End Awhite and orange, orange, white and green, blue, white and blue, green, white and
brown, and brown
End Bwhite and orange, orange, white and green, blue, white and blue, green, white and
brown, and brown

H-2
P/N: 046-000367-00 (3.0)

Vous aimerez peut-être aussi